EPA-600/2-78-038
June 1978
Environmental Protection Technology Series
                        EVALUATING AND  OPTIMIZING
                   ELECTRON  MICROSCOPE METHODS
        FOR CHARACTERIZING AIRBORNE ASBESTOS

                                 Environmental Sciences Research Laboratory
                                      Office of Research and Development
                                     U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                                Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711

-------
                RESEARCH REPORTING SERIES

Research reports of the Office of Research and Development. US. Environmental
Protection Agency, have been grouped into nine series. These nine broad cate-
gories were established to facilitate further development and application of en-
vironmental technology.  Elimination of traditional grouping was consciously
planned to foster technology transfer and a maximum interface in related fields.
The nine series are:

      1.   Environmental  Health Effects Research
      2.   Environmental  Protection Technology
      3.   Ecological Research
      4.   Environmental  Monitoring
      5.   Socioeconomic Environmental Studies
      6.   Scientific and Technical Assessment Reports (STAR)  .
      7.   Interagency  Energy-Environment Research and Development
      8.   "Special"  Reports
      9.   Miscellaneous Reports

This report has been assigned to the ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION TECH-
 NOLOGY series. This series describes research performed to develop and dem-
 onstrate instrumentation, equipment, and methodology to repair or prevent en-
 vironmental degradation from point and non-point sources of pollution. This work
 provides the new or improved technology required for the control and treatment
 of pollution sources to meet environmental quality standards.
This document is available to the public through the National Technical Informa-
tion Service, Springfield, Virginia  22161.

-------
                                          EPA 600/2-78-038
                                          June 1978
        EVALUATING AND OPTIMIZING ELECTRON MICROSCOPE
        METHODS FOR CHARACTERIZING AIRBORNE ASBESTOS
                             by

  A.V. Samudra, F.C. Bock, C.F. Harwood, and J.D. Stockham
                   IIT Research Institute
                  Chicago, Illinois  60616
                   Contract No. 68-02-2251
                       Project Officer

                         Jack Wagman
Director, Emissions Measurement and Characterization Division
         Environmental Sciences Research Laboratory
        Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
        ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES RESEARCH LABORATORIES
             OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
            U. S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
             RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, N. C. 27711

-------
                                 DISCLAIMER





     This report has been reviewed by the Environmental Sciences Research




Laboratory, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, and approved for publica-




tion.  Approval does not signify that the contents necessarily reflect the




views and policies of the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, nor does




mention of trade names or commercial products constitute endorsement or




recommendation for use.
                                     ii

-------
                                  FOREWARD

     The occurrence of asbestos or asbestiform minerals as pollutants in the
ambient air and in supplies of food and drinking water has caused consider-
able concern because occupational exposures to these fibrous materials have
been found to induce mesothelioma of the pleura and peritoneum, as well as
cancer of the lung, esophagus, and stomach, after latent periods of about 20
to 40 years.

     Electron microscopy is currently the principal technique used to
identify and characterize asbestos fibers in ambient air and water samples.
Because of the poor sensitivity and specificity of conventional bulk
analytical methods, electron microscopy is also being used for routine
measurement of airborne or waterborne asbestos concentrations.  The several
laboratories that perform such analyses generally have reasonable internal
self consistency.  However, interlaboratory comparisons have shown that the
results obtained by the separate laboratories are often widely different.

     In recognition of this problem, the Environmental Sciences Research
Laboratory, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, initiated a comprehensive
two-year study (June 1975 - June 1977) through EPA Contract No. 68-02-2251
to evaluate the various electron microscope procedures currently used for the
measurement of airborne asbestos concentrations.  The scope of work included
the development of an optimum procedure incorporating the best features of
current methods together with whatever improvements in sample collection,
specimen preparation, and electron microscope examination that seem desirable
for enhancement of accuracy and precision and for reduction of analysis time
and cost.

     A manual entitled "Electron Microscope Measurement of Airborne Asbestos
Concentrations — A Provisional Methodology Manual" describing an optimized
method resulting from this study has been published as EPA Report 600/2-78-
178 (August 1977).  This final report contains a detailed account of the
investigation and the experimental data supporting the provisional methodology.
                                        Jack Wagman
                                        Project Officer
                                        A. Paul Altshuller
                                        Director


                                        Environmental Sciences
                                             Research Laboratory
                                        Research Triangle Park, N.C.

                                     iii

-------
                                    ABSTRACT

     Electron microscopy is currently the principal technique used to identify
and characterize asbestos* fibers** in ambient air and water samples.  Varia-
tions in instrument capabilities, operator proficiency, and the myriad of tech-
niques used in microscopy laboratories have resulted in wide data scatter.
Under Contract No. 68-02-2251, a research program was initiated to evaluate the
electron microscope methods and subprocedures currently in use at different
laboratories to measure airborne asbestos fiber concentrations and develop a
composite procedure that would minimize the variability of results.
     Other objectives of the program were to provide a handbook describing the
optimized method and to test the ruggedness of the optimized method  through
interlaboratory analyses.
     A five-phase program of statistically designed experiments was  used  to
evaluate 19 major independent variables and 50 subprocedures  (or variable
levels).  The data from transmission and scanning electron microscopy  examina-
tion were analyzed by statistical techniques to evaluate  the effects of the
independent variables and subprocedures on two major dependent variables,
asbestos fiber number and mass concentrations.  Multiple  criteria were used to
select the independent variable levels for the optimized  procedure.
     The optimized method for estimating the concentration of asbestos fibers
in  ambient air samples has the following features:
     1.   Use polycarbonate membrane filters to collect ambient air  samples.
     2.   Coat the polycarbonate filter with a thin layer of carbon  to lock-in
          the collected fibers.

*   Asbestos is used as a collective term for the six minerals:  chrysotile,
    amosite, crocidolite, and the asbestiform varieties of anthophyllite,
    actinolite, and tremolite.
**  The term fiber is used for a particle with an aspect ratio of  3:1 or
    greater, and with substantially parallel sides.

                                     iv

-------
     3.   Transfer the collected fibers to 200 mesh electron microscope grids
          in a modified Jaffe washer using chloroform to dissolve the filter.
     4.   Examine the grids in a transmission electron microscope (TEM) at a
          screen magnification of 16,OOOX.
     5.   Identify and characterize each fiber from its morphology and
          selected-area electron diffraction (SAED) pattern.  Place the fibers
          into three categories: chrysotile, amphibole, and non-asbestos.
     6.   Enumerate the number of asbestos fibers using the field-of-view
          method.  If mass concentration information is needed, measure the
          length and width of each fiber and compute the mass from the fiber
          volume and density data.
     A manual describing the optimized method was prepared and reviewed by
six independent laboratories.  The manual was subsequently published as
Environmental Protection Agency Technology Series Document EPA-600/2-77-178,
"Electron Microscope Measurement of Airborne Asbestos Concentrations - A
Provisional Methodology Manual", August, 1977.
     The ruggedness of the optimized method was tested by the six laboratories.
These laboratories used the method to analyze two filters upon which airborne
asbestos fibers had been deposited and were carbon coated to prevent loss of
the fibers.  One sample was prepared by sampling pure UICC chrysotile that
was aerosolized into a large chamber.  The second sample was collected from
the air inside an industrial plant processing asbestos.  These samples were
labeled "Lab" and "Field" sample, respectively.
     The interlaboratory studies showed the average precision of chrysotile
fiber concentration estimates, as determined by the ratio of the standard
error of the mean to the mean expressed as a percentage, was about 21% for
both the lab and field samples.  The average precision of chrysotile mass
concentration estimates was 22% for the lab sample and 44% for the field
sample when ashing of the filter was used as a subprocedure.  When ashing was
not used, the average precision for the field sample was 54%.  The lower pre-
cision of the chrysotile mass concentration estimates for the field sample is
attributed to the presence of a few large bundles of fibers.  These few
bundles do not affect the number concentration estimates but significantly
influence mass estimates.  As a result, it is suggested that fiber bundles
                 3
greater than 1 ym  should be reported separately.

-------
     The accuracy of the transmission electron microscope procedure for esti-
mating the mass concentration of chrysotile was determined by comparing the
computed mass from fiber volume and density data with the computed mass calcu-
lated from the magnesium concentration obtained by x-ray fluorescence spectro-
                                                    3
metry (XRF).  A chrysotile fiber density of 2.6 g/cm  was used to compute
fiber mass from size data.  A factor of 3.8 times the magnesium concentration
was used to determine chrysotile fiber mass by XRF.  For the lab sample, the
mass estimates for chrysotile agreed within 10%.  For the field sample, the
mass estimate obtained by electron microscopy was a factor 4.2 less than
that obtained by XRF.  The difference is attributed to the presence of
fiber bundles and other sources of magnesium in the field sample.
     Testing of the subprocedure that incorporates ashing, resuspension, ultra-
sonification, and refiltering of the lab and field samples gave inconclusive
results.  The mean fiber lengths were decreased by the ashing subprocedure and
fiber concentration estimates were significantly increased (4-8 times higher
for ashed sample than the unashed) .  The data cannot resolve whether the ap-
parent increase in fiber concentration in the ashed sample results from fiber
breakage or results from less interference in observing and identifying small
fibrils in the diluted ashed sample.  It is suggested that the ashing subpro-
cedure should be used only when the direct transfer method is not suitable.
     This report is submitted in fulfillment of EPA Contract No. 68-02-2251,
IITRI Project No. C6351, by IIT Research Institute under sponsorship of the
Environmental Protection Agency.  This report covers the period July, 1975,
to June, 1977.
                                     vi

-------
                                    CONTENTS
Foreword	  .  .  .  *	iii
Abstract	iv
Figures	,	. ix
Tables	xii
Acknowledgments	 xv

   1.  Introduction 	     1
   2.  Conclusions  	     3
   3.  Recommendations	     6
   4.  Scope of the Work	     8
            Introduction	     8
            Strategy  	     9
   5.  Statistically Designed Experimental Plans  	    17
            Introduction	    17
            Five phase program	    18
   6.  Experimental Work	    28
            The preparation of laboratory filters  of controlled asbestos
              loading in Phase 1	    28
            Sample preparation for TEM	    34
            Examining samples in transmission electron microscope 	    34
            Data recording	    36
            Experimental work in Phase 2:  Study of  fiber  identification
              method.	    36
            Experimental work in Phase 3:  Evaluating a TEM and an SEM  .  .    37
            Experimental work in Phase 4:  Ashing  and sonification  ....    40
            Experimental work in Phase 5:  Study of  direct drop method  .  .    44
   7.  Results and Discussion of Phase 1	    45
            Introduction  	    45
            Criteria selected 	    45
            Summary of Phase 1 results	    45
            Statistical distribution tests  	    47
            Mass concentration estimates  	    67
   8.  Results and Discussion of Phases 2, 3, 4 and  5	,  .    70
            Phase 2 results	    70
            Results and discussion of Phase 3	    87
            Phase 4 results	    90
            Statistical analysis of Phase 5 data	104
   9.  Provisional Optimized Method and Round-Robin  Testing 	   109
            Preparing calibration filters . 	   109
            Final choice of samples for round-robin  test	110
            Independent estimate of chrysotile mass  concentrations  ....   Ill
                                       vii

-------
                              CONTENTS (continued)


  10.  Results and Discussion of Round-Robin Tests  	  113
            Poisson distribuiton tests  	  113
            General procedures  	  115
            Interlaboratory comparisons 	  121
            Graphical representation of results 	  ....  125
            Accuracy and precision of estimates 	  125
            Effect of ashing, ultrasonification, and reconstitution  ....  137
            Conclusions	  145
References	  .  147
Appendices

   A.  The Experiment Design for Phase 1	152
   B.  Regression Analysis  	  157
   C.  Poisson Distribution Tests 	  166
   D.  Optimized Method for Measurement of Airborne Asbestos Concentrations  175
   E.  Estimating Chrysotile Mass on Air Filters Using Neutron Activation
         Technique	177
   F.  X-Ray Fluorescence Analysis of Standard Samples of Chrysotile   .  .  .  179
                                       viii

-------
                                      FIGURES
Number                                                                         Page

   1   Flow chart of electron microscope procedures for estimating size
         distribution and concentration of airborne asbestos 	   10

   2   (a) Top view and size view of aerosol chamber showing location of
         apparatus.  (b) Flow diagram of aerosol generator 	   30

   3   Graphical presentation of performance equation 9 in Phase 1.  Net
         contribution to square root of fiber concentration (no. of all
         fibers/cm3 of air)	   59

   4   Graphical presentation of performance equation 9 in Phase 1.  Net
         contribution of square root of fiber concentration (no. of all
         fibers/cm3 of air)	   60

   5   Graphical presentation of performance equation 10 in Phase 1.  Net
         contribution to natural log of mass concentration of all fibers,
         Vlg/m3 of air	   61

   6   Graphical presentation of performance equation 10 in Phase 1.  Net
         contribution to natural log of mass concentration of all fibers,
         yg/m3 of air	   62

   7   Estimated number concentration of chrysotile fibers in the nine
         Phase 2 samples (standard classification method), with 95% confidence
         intervals	   82

   8   Estimated mass concentration of chrysotile fibers in Phase 2 (standard
         and alternative classification methods) in relation to filter
         composition, transfer method, and identification technique, with 90%
         confidence intervals	   83

   9   Estimated geometric mean length of chrysotile fibers in Phase 2
         (standard classification method) in relation to filter composition
         and transfer method, with 90% confidence intervals	  .   84

  10   Estimated percent of all Phase 2 fibers that were exceptional
         (ambiguous or other by the standard classification method) in
         relation to transfer method and identification technique, with 90%
         confidence intervals	   85

  11   Graphical presentation of performance equation 6 in Phase 4.  Net
         contribution to square root of fiber concentration, 106/cm2 of
         filter	   97
                                         ix

-------
                                FIGURES  (continued)
Number
  12   Graphical presentation of performance equation 9 in Phase 4.  Net
         contribution to mean log of  fiber length  (ym)	   98

  13   Graphical presentation of performance equation 1 in Phase 5.  Net
         contribution to square root  of  fiber  concentration  (106 fibers/cm2)  .  108

  14   90% confidence intervals  (inner)  and 95%  confidence intervals on the
         mean fiber number  concentration 	  117

  15   95% confidence intervals about the means  in laboratory air  sample  154
         (see Tables 42 and 45)	126

  16   95% confidence intervals about the means  in field  air sample 661 (see
         Tables 43 and 46), ashed samples only	127

  17   95% confidence intervals about the means  in field  air sample 661 (see
         Tables 44 and 47), unashed samples only	128
                                          x

-------
                                     TABLES
Number                                                                       Page

   1   Procedural Variables of Electron Microscope Method	    11

   2   Independent Variables Selected for Evaluation in This Study 	    15

   3   Representative Dependent Variables in Phase 1 	    19

   4   Independent Variables, Phase 1	  	    20

   5   Phase 1 Experiment Design (Compact Notation)	    21

   6   Phase 1 Experimental Plant (Long Notation)	    22

   7   Phase 2 Experiment Design 	 	    24

   8   Phase 3 Experiment Design 	    25

   9   Phase 4 Experiment Design 	    26

  10   Phase 5 Experiment Design .	    27

  11   Experimental Scheme for Simulated Air Samples for Phase  1	    35

  12   Scheme of Electron Microscope Parameters for Fiber Identification
         Methods in Phase 2	    38

  13   Details of the Ashing Parameters Used in Phase 4	    42

  14   Summary of Phase 1 Data	    46

  15   Tests for Applicability of the Poisson Distribution to Number of
         Fibers Per Field	    48

  16   Variable Level Frequency Distribution in Two Groups 	    50

  17   Precision in Fiber Count Per Field as a Criterion for Optimizing. .  .    53

  18   Variable Level Frequency Distribution in Two Group	    54

  19   Dependent Variables, Phase 1	 .....    57

  20   Signs of Coefficients of Independent Variables in Performance
         Equations, Phase 1	    58
                                         xi

-------
                                TABLES (continued)


Number                                                                       Page

  21   Optimization of Variable Levels According to Four Different
         Criteria	   66

  22   Estimates of Number and Mass Concentration of All Fibers Per Unit
         Volume of Air, Phase 1	   68

  23   Numbers of Fibers Observed and Classified, Phase 2 Samples. ......   72

  24   Concentrations of Chrysotile Fibers, Phase 2 Samples	   73

  25   Size Distributions of Chrysotile Fibers, Phase 2 Samples	   74

  26   Concentrations of All Fibers and of Fibers of "Ambiguous" and
         "Other" Categories, Phase 2 Samples 	   75

  27   Phase 2 Regression Equations	   78

  28   Properties of Phase 2 Regression Equations	   79

  29   Summary of Phase 3 Data	   88

  30   Difference in Number of Chrysotile Fibers Counted When Same Grid
         Openings are Observed Under SEM and Convensional TEM Mode in
         JEOL 100C	   91

  31   Estimating Chrysotile Asbestos in Phase 4 Samples (Ashing and
         Sonification Experiments) 	   92

  32   Size Distribution Characteristics of Chrysotile Fibers in Phase 4
         Samples (Ashing and Sonification Experiments) 	   93

  33   Values of Dependent Variables in Phase 4	   95

  34   Means and Standard Deviations of Dependent Values in Phase 4	   96

  35   Regression Equations in Phase 4	   96

  36   Characteristics of Fiber Length in Cumulative Distribution in
         Phase 4	100

  37   Characteristics of Fiber Width in Cumulative Distribution in
         Phase 4	101

  38   Values of Dependent Variables in Phase 5	105

  39   Fiber Number and Mass Concentration in Phase 5	106

  40   Tests for Applicability of the Poisson Distribution to Number of
         Fibers Per Field	114
                                        xii

-------
                                TABLES (continued)


Number                                                                       Page

  41   Mean Values and Lower and Upper Limits of Fiber Concentration
         Estimate According to Poisson Distribution	116

  42   Summary of Round-Robin Test Results on Air Sample 154	118

  43   Summary of Round-Robin Test Results on Field Sample 661 (All Samples
         Ashed)	119

  44   Summary of Round-Robin Test Results on Field Sample 661 (All Samples
         Analyzed Without Ashing)	120

  45   95% Confidence Intervals on the Mean Estimates for Individual
         Operators in Air Sample 154 (See Table 42)	122

  46   95% Confidence Intervals on the Mean Estimates for Individual
         Operators in Field Air Sample 661 (See Table 42) (Ashed Samples
         Only)	123

  47   95% Confidence Intervals on the Mean Estimates for Individual
         Operators in Field Air Sample 661 (See Table 44) (Unashed Samples
         Only)	124

  48   Precision of Fiber Concentration Estimates on Laboratory Air
         Sample 154	130

  49   Precision of Fiber Concentration Estimates of Field Sample 661 (All
         Samples Ashed)	132

  50   Precision of Fiber Concentration Estimates of Field Sample 661
         (Unashed)	 .  133

  51   Precision of Different Measurements in the Two Samples	134

  52   Effect of a Few Large Bundles on Number Concentration and Mass
         Concentration of Chrysotile in Field Sample 661 ..... 	  136

  53   Effect of Low Temperature Ashing and Reconstltution of Fiber
         Concentration Estimates 	  138

  54   Effect of Low Temperature Ashing and Reconstitution of Mean Fiber
         Dimensions	139

  55   Length Distribution in Ashed and Unashed Samples, Data from
         Operator Number 2	  141

  56   Length Distribution in Ashed and Unashed Samples, Data from
         Operator Number 4	142
                                        xiii

-------
                                TABLES (continued)


Number                                                                       Page

  57   Length Distribution in Ashed and Unashed Samples, Data from
         Operator Number 5	143

  58   Length Distribution in Ashed and Unashed Samples, Data from
         Operator Number 6	144
                                       xiv

-------
                              ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

     The authors gratefully acknowledge the expert technical support of
several colleagues.  Meticulous work in preparing simulated air samples in
our laboratory by Mr. David R. Jones deserves a special mention.  The assist-
ance of Mr. Jones and Mr. George Yamate in electron microscopy work is also
acknowledged.  Prompt secretarial effort of Miss Elaine Brown and Miss Bonnie
Fitzpatrick is duly acknowledged.
     Acknowledgments are also due to Dr. Philip Cook of EPA, Duluth, MN,
Mr. J. M. Long of EPA, Athens, GA, Mr. John Miller of EPA, Research Triangle
Park, NC, Dr. Ralph Zumwalde of NIOSH, Cincinnati, OH, Dr. Edward Peters of
A.D. Little, Cambridge, MA, and Miss Wendy Dicker of Ontario .Ministry of
Environment, Toronto, Canada, for reviewing the methodology manual and for
participating in the round-robin test of air samples.
     Finally, the authors thank Dr. Jack Wagman of the Environmental Protection
Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC, for his continued interest and encouragement,
                                     xv

-------
                                  SECTION 1
                                INTRODUCTION

     The association of asbestos microfibers with adverse health effects
prompted various governmental agencies and private industries to consider the
electron microscope for characterizing microfibers in air.  The choice of the
electron microscope is ideal because of  its ability to detect very fine fibers,
estimate the size and shape, and identify each fiber from morphology and elec-
tron diffraction supplemented, in some instances, by energy-dispersive X-ray
analysis.  No other instrument matches the modern analytical electron micro-
scopes in overall capabilities.  The information gained on the quantity of
fibers and their characteristics in given localities can be utilized to under-
stand the significance of fiber exposure in terms of health hazard.
     Unfortunately, because of the recent and rapid utilization of electron
microscopes for quantifying fiber concentration levels, there is no standard
methodology.  In general, many different techniques and procedures have been
used to collect samples, prepare samples for electron microscopy, examine the
samples in the electron microscope, and  interpret and evaluate the results.
As a consequence, the various laboratories performing the asbestos character-
ization in air samples have reasonable intralaboratory agreement; but, inter-
laboratory agreement is totally unacceptable.  This wide variability in results
of electron microscope studies makes the technique unacceptable in a court-
of-law, and the electron microscope results are generally treated as order-
of-magnitude estimates for broad comparisons only.  Since this is a serious
limitation on a powerful tool, it is very important to understand the sources
of this variation and minimize or eliminate the variation by appropriate
optimization.
     The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency realized the need for the develop-
ment of an optimum methodology, particularly with respect to asbestos in air
because of its known association with cancer.  The present study at IIT Research
Institute, directed at developing an optimum analytical methodology for
                                      1  '

-------
determining asbestos* fibers** in the ambient air, uses statistically designed
experimental techniques for simultaneous evaluation of a large number of inde-
pendent variables and subprocedures.   As stated in the scope of work, the inves-
tigation included "the development of an electron microscope procedure incor-
porating the best features of the current methods together with whatever im-
provements in sample collection, specimen preparation, and electron microscope
examination seem desirable for enhancement of accuracy and precision and re-
ducing analysis time and cost."  The optimum procedure sought in this study is
one that yields maximum information on asbestos fiber characteristics in the
airborne state (from studying fibers collected on suitable filters) , including
fiber count and size distribution, as well as mass concentration.
*  Asbestos is used as a collective term for the six minerals: chrysotile,
   amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, actinolite, and tremolite.
** The term fiber is used for a particle with an aspect ratio of 3:1 or
   greater, and with substantially parallel sides.

-------
                                 SECTION 2

                                CONCLUSIONS
     The major conclusions drawn from the statistically designed experiments
and the interlaboratory investigations are itemized below.

     1.   The optimized method for characterizing the asbestos levels  in
          ambient air samples by electron microscopy is summarized as  follows:

          a.   Collect ambient air samples for asbestos analysis on 0.4  ym
               pore size polycarbonate membrane filters.

          b.   Secure the collected fibers to the filter as soon as possible
               after collection by vapor depositing a 40 nm thick layer  of
               carbon on the filter.

          c.   Transfer the collected fibers to an electron microscope grid
               by dissolving the filter in a Jaffe washer using chloroform
               as a solvent.

          d.   Place the electron microscope grid in a transmission electron
               microscope (TEM) and observe the' fibers at a magnification of
               20,OOOX (screen magnification 16,OOOX).  A lower magnification,
               about 10,OOOX, is adequate for samples containing predominently
               amphibole asbestos fibers or where the aim is to assess the
               total mass of the asbestos fibers and the detection of  very
               small fibers is unimportant.

          e.   Identify and characterize the observed fibers by their  mor-
               phology and selected area electron diffraction pattern.  Use
               energy dispersive X-ray spectrescopy, if available, to  aid
               in the classification of fibers not classified by SAED.  The
               ED X-ray technique is particularly useful for characterizing
               amphibole asbestos minerals that exhibit indistinguishable
               electron diffraction patterns.

          f.   Enumerate the asbestos fibers using the field-of-view method
               for medium and high fiber loading levels and the full-grid
               opening method for low loading levels.  If mass concentration
               data are needed, measure the length and width of each fiber
               and compute the mass from the fiber volume and density.

     2.    The identification of fibers based on morphology  and electron  dif-
          fraction, as proposed by the optimized method, is adequate for clas-
          sifying fibers into three categories: chrysotile, amphibole  asbestos,

-------
     and other minerals.   This identification  scheme provides  the  largest
     amount of information for the analysis  time;  it is  2  to 3 times
     faster than methods  involving X-ray analysis.  Thus,  the  proposed
     methodology is cost  effective.

3.   The subprocedure of  ashing,  ultrasonification, and  refiltration  of
     the collected material is not recommended despite the lack of
     strong evidence to show the  subprocedure  is  detrimental.   Ashing
     decreases the fiber  lengths.   This  should result  in an increase  in
     the number of fibers; but, the fiber number  concentrations of ashed
     and unashed samples  were statistically  equivalent in  Phase 4
     data.  In the interlaboratory tests, however,  ashing subprocedure
     gave decreased fiber length  and increased fiber number concentration,
     as compared with the unashed sample. The data could not  resolve
     whether the apparent increase in fiber  number concentration in the
     ashed sample resulted from fiber breakage or from reduced inter-
     ference in detecting and identifying small fibrils  of chrysotile.
     It is suggested that ashing  be reserved for  those instances where
     the TEM grids prepared by the optimized method are  unsuited for
     analysis.  These instances include  those  where fiber loadings are
     high and dilution is necessary and  where  the presence of  organic
     matter obscures the  observation of  the  fibers.

4.   The presence of a few large  bundles of  fibers strongly influence
     mass concentration estimates but has no significant effect on num-
     ber concentration estimates.   To circumvent  the effect of bundles,
     it is suggested that bundles greater than 1  ym^ be  counted as single
     entities.  These bundles should be  reported  separately and, if mass
     information is needed, a significant number  of bundles should be
     counted and sized.

5.   The conventional transmission electron  microscope is superior to
     the scanning electron microscope for detecting and  identifying
     chrysotile fibrils.   The superiority results from the higher re-
     solution and the stationary  image in the  TEM.

6.   Samples of airborne  chrysotile prepared in the laboratory and an-
     alyzed by several laboratories using the  optimized  procedure
     showed good precision and accuracy.  The  ratio of the spread between
     the 95% confidence limits to the mean value  was about 0.48 for
     chrysotile fiber number concentration and about 0.40 for  chrysotile
     mass concentration.   The mass concentration  computed from size and
     density data compared favorably with the  mass estimate obtained  by
     X-ray fluorescence.

7.   Samples of air collected in  a plant handling asbestos materials
     give less precision  and accuracy than the pure chrysotile sample
     prepared in the laboratory.   When ashing  was used as a subprocedure,
     the ratio of the spread between the 95% confidence  limits to the
     mean value was about 0.49 for the chrysotile fiber  concentration
     estimates and about  1.57 for the chrysotile  mass  concentration es-
     timates.   Without ashing, the corresponding  values  were 0.62 and
     2.34.   The mass estimates based on size and  density were a
     factor of 4.2 less than the  mass obtained by X-ray  fluorescence.
     The lower precision  estimate of the field sample  is due to the

-------
presence of a few large fiber bundles and to the possible presence
of sources of magnesium other than chrysotile.  These factors com-
bine to underestimate the chrysotile mass obtained by electron
microscope and overestimate the chrysotile mass obtained by X-ray
fluorescence.

-------
                                 SECTION 3

                              RECOMMENDATIONS


     The following  recommendations are made to further the development and

acceptance of the optimized method for characterizing airborne asbestos by

electron microscope.

     1.    Sampling  and  collection methods were only briefly addressed in the
          present study.  Further study in five areas is recommended.  First,
          the deployment of polycarbonate filters in the field presents han-
          dling  problems.  Field investigators prefer the cellulose ester
          filters.  While cellulose ester filter deposits can be transferred
          to  electron microscope grids in a Jaffe washer using acetone, the
          microscopist  prefers the clarity of the transferred deposit from
          polycarbonate filters.  Therefore, a technique for transferring the
          deposit from  cellulose ester filters to polycarbonate filters needs
          development.  Secondly, the effect of face velocity on the collec-
          tion of fibers needs clarification.  Personal samplers, with 1/5 the
          face velocity of high-volume samplers, gave higher fiber count
          estimates.  Thirdly, a method for securing the deposit to the fil-
          ter substrate at the collection site needs to be devised.  Fourthly,
          the rearrangement or loss of fibers on the filter due to handling
          and transportation of the sample to the laboratory needs to be
          determined.   And, fifthly, the collection efficiencies of the poly-
          carbonate and cellulose ester filters for small filters need
          evaluation.

    2.    Computer programs for the quantitative identification of asbestos
          minerals from energy-dispersive X-ray spectra need to be developed.
          At  present, the method is only semiquantitative.  A quantitative
          method  should allow obtaining proportions of the various elements
          or  their oxides and comparing them with standard reference spectra
          stored  in a computer memory.  A search technique should use reit-
          erative techniques to narrow the choice among the possible refer-
          ence spectra  and the unknown by assigning probabilities to the de-
          gree of match between the spectra.  Some preliminary work along
          these lines is reported by Millette and McFarren.[47]

    3.   The modifications suggested in this report for dealing with fiber
         bundles need  to be tested.  New and improved methodology, such as
         stratified analyses, needs to be investigated.  These modifications
         should  improve the reliability of the fiber mass concentration data
         computed from fiber size and density estimates.

    4.   Further work is needed to determine the effect of the total area

-------
     scanned, i.e., the number of fibers counted, on the reliability
     of the fiber concentration estimate.

5.   The present study produced inconclusive results for a few sub-
     procedures.  More definitive studies are suggested to clarify the
     importance of these subprocedures.  The effects of low temperature
     ashing, diluent and dispersant selection, and ultrasonic treatment
     should be isolated.

6.   Intralaboratory reproducibility should be determined.  Duplicate
     samples should be exposed at different times to the entire sequence
     of processing steps from collection to TEM examination.

7.   Additional round-robin tests are suggested to obtain a complete
     picture of interlaboratory variability.

8.   Techniques, other than electron microscopy, should be sought to
     assess the mass of asbestos minerals present in ambient air
     samples.

-------
                                  SECTION 4
                              SCOPE OF THE WORK

 INTRODUCTION
      Although asbestos  fibers are a definite health hazard  [1-27], the effects
 of low-dosage,  chronic  inhalation exposures from natural and occupational en-
 vironments have not been defined  [23-27].  It is believed that  fiber  charac-
 teristics and size distribution are important parameters in addition  to  the
 amount of asbestos in the  inhaled air  [21,22].  There are several methods
 available for determining  the mass of asbestos [27-39].  X-ray  diffraction
 [31-35],  X-ray fluorescence, differential thermal analysis  [36], infrared spec-
 troscopy  [37-39], neutron  activation analysis [28], and atomic  absorption can-
 not distinguish fibrous from non-fibrous minerals and cannot give fiber  size
 distribution  data.  Optical and electron microscope methods allow the size dis-
 tribution data to be  obtained.  The main limitations of the optical microscope
 methods are the inability  to detect fibers smaller than about 0.2 ym  diameter.
 Electron  optical instruments allow much better resolution and facilitate recog-
 nition of asbestos from non-asbestos minerals from studying morphological fea-
 tures [15-17,30,40-43].  Further authentic identification is possible using
 electron  diffraction  data  obtained with a transmission electron microscope
 [44-48] and by  using  X-ray emission spectroscopy data in electron-probe  instru-
 ments or  scanning electron microscopes [35,42-44,47-49].  New analytical elec-
 tron  microscopes are  now available which allow all three types  of data  (mor-
 phological, electron  diffraction, and X-ray spectroscopy) on individual  fibers
 for unique  and  fullest  characterization of particles  [47-49].   However,  because
 of the rapid acceptance and utilization of electron optical instruments, there
 is no standard methodology available.  Several laboratories perform  the  analysis
 of airborne asbestos  fibers and while they claim a reasonable internal  consis-
 tency, the results obtained by separate laboratories are often  widely different.
The purpose of this study  was to evaluate the methods and subprocedures  cur-
rently in use in different laboratories, and to select and  develop a composite

-------
procedure which will minimize the variability of results.  The second objective
of the program was to prepare a detailed handbook describing the optimized
method without ambiguity.  The third objective was to test this optimized
method by several independent laboratories in a round-robin test and evaluate
the results and to further improve it.
STRATEGY
     A strategy to five tasks was planned for evaluating and optimizing a
large number of important procedures, subprocedures, or variables.
Task 1;  Literature Search and Survey of EM Procedures
Published Work and Experience of Analytical Laboratories—
     A reference library containing over a thousand articles on asbestos-related
topics was compiled.  Several prominent investigators were contacted and asked
to supply details of their methods for estimating asbestos.  Selected labora-
tories were visited to study first-hand the different aspects of specimen col-
lection, specimen preparation and examination, and evaluation of the data.  The
laboratories visited were:
     (a)  Dow Chemical Laboratory, Midland, MI; Dr. Don Beamon
     (b)  Battelle Memorial Institute, Columbus, OH; Dr. Heffelfinger
     (c)  Atomic Energy Research Establishment, Harwell, England; Dr. A. E.
          Morgan
     (d)  Pneumoconiosis Research Institute, Penarth, Wales; Dr. V. Timbrell
     (e)  Franklin Research Institute, Philadelphia, PA; Dr. A. Pattnaik
     (f)  Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, DC; Dr. L. S. Birks
     (g)  Mount Sinai Laboratory, New York, NY; Dr. Arthur Langer
     (h)  McCrone Associates, Chicago, IL; Dr. I. Stewart
     (i)  National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Cincinnati,
          OH; Dr. Ralph Zumwalde
List of Possible Variables—
     The electron microscope method involves several steps such as sample col-
lection, sample preparation, sample examination, and interpretation of  results.
A generalized scheme for quantitative characterization of asbestos is illustrated
in Figure 1.  Table 1 lists the various steps and subprocedures which may be

-------
                                Sample
                                 Air
                            Prepare Filter
                                Sample
                           Ashing of Filter
                              Prepare TEM
                                 Grid
                            EM Examination
                                of Grid
                         Fiber Identification
                               and Count
                         Evaluate, Interpret,
                             and Estimate
                            Concentration
Dilution and
Redeposition
  on  Filter
Figure 1.   Flow chart of electron microscope procedures for estimating size
           distribution and concentration of airborne asbestos.
                                   10

-------
                                  Table 1

             PROCEDURAL VARIABLES OF ELECTRON MICROSCOPY METHOD
Variable
       Variable  Label
                Levels
    3


    4


    5

    6
   10
   11
   12
   13
Sampling Variables

Asbestos Source Type and Time



Distance from Source


Sampler Type


Volume Sampled


Filter Type


Pore Size
          Locking of Particulates  to
          Filter
          Filter Examination Variables

          Location on Filter
          Magnification, nominal
Measurement Method
Examiner
Ashing Variables

Portion of Original Filter
Used for Ashing
Ignition Before Ashing
(1)  raw fiber
(2)  cement industry
(3)  plastics industry

(1)  point
(2)  near point
(3)  ambient
(1)  personal
(2)  hi-vol

(1)  small
(2)  medium
(3)  large
(1)  cellulose acetate
(2)  polycarbonate
(1)  0.2 ym
(2)  0.4 ym
(3)  0.8 ym
(1)  none
(2)  carbon coating
(3)  gelatinizing
(1)  center
(2)  mid-radius
(3)  periphery
(1)  5,OOOX
(2)  10,OOOX
(3)  20,OOOX
(1)  ruler
(2)  eyeball using micrograph
(3)  eyeball using fluorescent screen

(1)  #1
(2)  #2
(3)  #3
(1) pieshape #1
(2) pieshape #2
(3) pieshape #3
(1) none
(2) yes
                                      11

-------
                            Table 1 (continued)
Variable
        Variable Label
                Levels
   14     Ashing

   15     Duration of Ashing

          Suspension and Redeposition

   16     Dilution Medium


   17     Bonification


   18     Duration of Sonification


   19     Type of Redeposition Filter


          Grid Preparation Variables
   20     3 mm Sample Location


   21     Deposition Method



   22     Type of EM Grid
   23
   24
   25
Mesh Size of the EM Grid
Filter Side During Washing
Grid Examination Variables
Fiber Identification Method
   26
Grid Opening
                               (1) low temperature
                               (2) high temperature
                               (1) short (2 hrs)
                               (2) long (24 hrs)
                               (1) Toluene
                               (2) Aerosol O.T. 0.1%
                               (3) Aerosol O.T. 0.2%
                               (1) none
                               (2) low energy
                               (3) high energy
                               (1) short
                               (2) medium
                               (3) long
                               (1) cellulose acetate
                               (2) polycarbonate
(1)  center
(2)  mid-radius
(3)  periphery
(1)  cold finger soxhlet extraction
    (short duration)
(2)  Soxhlet extraction (long duration)
(3)  Jaffe-Method
(1)  copper
(2)  nickel

(1)  200-mesh
(2)  400-mesh

(1)  particle side up
(2)  particle side down
(1)  TEM-Morphology
(2)  TEM-Morphology plus diffraction
(3)  TEM-Morphology plus chemistry
(4)  TEM-Morphology plus diffraction
    plus chemistry
(5)  SEM-Morphology
(6)  SEM-Morphology plus chemistry

(1)  center
(2)  mid-radius
(3)  periphery
                                     12

-------
                            Table 1  (continued)
Variable
Variable Label
   27     Field Selection
   28     Magnification
   29     Operator
   30     Experience of Operator
Levels
                        (1)  random
                        (2)  consecutive
                        (3)  full grid opening
                        (1)  5,OOOX
                        (2)  10,OOOX
                        (3)  20,OOOX

                        (1)  #1
                        (2)  #2
                        (3)  #3

                        (1)  short
                        (2)  long
                                      13

-------
important.  The list is by no means complete.  One can extend it further.
     It is clear that a large number of steps are involved in following any of
the several possible paths.  At each step, a multitude of choices is possible.
There is no apriori way of choosing a particular level or a step on a rational
basis.  Therefore, one must evaluate these and provide a rational basis for
selection of a step and selection of the proper level in each variable.
Task 2:  Selection of Procedures or Subprocedure Variables and Experimental
Plan
     The number of possible variables listed in Table 1 is large and evaluating
all of  them would mean spreading the experimental effort too thinly over too
large an area.  To avoid this and to achieve meaningful estimates, the choice
was narrowed down to 19 as shown in Table 2.  In view of this large number of
variables, it was necessary to adopt a multiphase approach, each phase util-
izing a statistically designed experimental plan.  This approach yields a maxi-
mum of  information with a high degree of statistical significance for a given
experimental effort.
     A  highly fractionated factorial design was used.  Independent variables
were controlled simultaneously according to a predetermined experimental scheme.
Each of the tests (or set of data) represented a unique combination of several
independent variables.
Task 3;  Statistical Evaluation of the Variables
     The results obtained from Task 2 were evaluated using statistical methods.
The data allowed several dependent variables to be studied and explained their
relationship with the independent variables.
Task 4;  Development of an Optimal Procedure
     The evaluation from Task 3 was to lead to selecting those independent
variables and their level which gave the least variability of results.  One
could formulate a combination of these variables into a composite procedure.
These subprocedural steps are described in detail in the form of a manual.
Task 5:   Statistical Evaluation of the Optimal Method
     The performance of this optimized method was evaluated in a round-robin
test  on  the same air samples by independent laboratories.
                                      14

-------
                                  Table 2

        INDEPENDENT VARIABLES SELECTED FOR EVALUATION IN THIS STUDY
          Variable
     Composition of Sample
 X~  Concentration of Sample
 Xo  Sampling Instrument

 X^  Filter Type

 X5  Pore Size, nominal
                      Levels
 Xy
X15
Filter Orientation
(Particle Side)

2.3 mm Portion
Location

Use of Carbon Coating

Transfer Method
Magnification, nominal


Grid Opening



Choice of Fields



Identification




Ashing


Sonification
(1)  #1 100% Chrysotile
(2)  #2 60% Chrysotile + 40% Amphibole
(3)  #3 70% Chrysotile + 20% Amphibole + 10% Non-
    Asbestos Fiber

(1)  Low  (2) Medium  (3) High
(1)  Hi-Vol
(2)  Personal
(1)  Nuclepore (polycarbonate)
(2)  Millipore (cellulose acetate)

(1)  0.2  ym
(2)  0.4  urn
(3)  0.8 ym
(1)  Down  (2) Up
(1) Periphery
(2) Mid-radius
(3) Center
(1) Yes
(2) No
(1) Soxhlet Extraction 1 (short)
(2) Soxhlet Extraction 2 (long)
(3) Jaffe Method
(1) 5,OOOX
(2) 10,OOOX
(3) 20,OOOX
(1) Periphery
(2) Mid-radius
(3) Center
(1) Random
(2) Consecutive
(3) Full Grid Opening
(1) Morphology plus chemistry
(2) Morphology plus diffraction
(3) Morphology plus chemistry plus diffraction
(4) Morphology alone
(1) High Temperature
(2) Low Temperature
(1) Low Energy
(2) Medium Energy
(3) High Energy
                                      15

-------
                            Table 2  (continued)
          Variable
X_-  Redeposition Filter
 16

%• ^  2.3 mm Portion of
     Redeposition Filter


X    Instrument
     Ignition Before Ashing
                      Levels
(1)  Millipore (cellulose acetate)
(2)  Nuclepore (polycarbonate)

(1)  Periphery
(2)  Mid-radius
(3)  Center

(1)  JSM 50A
(2)  JEOL 100C
(1)  No
(2)  Yes
                                      16

-------
                                  SECTION 5
                  STATISTACALLY DESIGNED EXPERIMENTAL PLANS

 INTRODUCTION
     There  are  different  ways  of  investigating  systems having many independent
 variables.
 Two Extreme Approaches
     One  approach  consists  of  varying  only  one  variable at a time, holding all
 others  fixed.   This  is  the  simplest  and most unambiguous way of evaluating each
 of the  variables by  itself.  However,  this  approach  does not provide informa-
 tion on a variable when other  variables are also changed simultaneously.  At
 the other extreme, to obtain all  passible combinations of all independent vari-
 ables and their levels  may  require an  astronomically large experimental effort.
 For the problem being studied,  in which there are 19 independent variables with
                                                                  19
 three possible  levels per variable,  the number  of tests would be 3  , which is
 an astronomically  large number, and  it would clearly be impractical to proceed
 with this complete factorial approach.
 Fractional  Factorial Designs
     This approach allows evaluation of a large number of independent variables
 with a  reasonable  experimental  effort.  It  is the best approach for screening
 the most  important variables from other less important ones.  These important
 variables can then be studied  in  greater detail in subsequent small experiments.
 A good  discussion  of the  statistical design of  experiments may be found in
 References  50-54.
     In this project, fractional  factorial  experiment designs of a special class
 were utilized for  the investigation  and optimization of procedural variables
 in the electron microscope  examination of airborne asbestos.  These designs are
 characterized as having three levels per factor (which can be reduced to two
where desired) and being  highly efficient in the sense that the number of test
 combinations is small compared with  the number  of effects that can be estimated.
                                      17

-------
The use of properly coded values (linear and quadratic) permits orthogonal esti-
mates of the effects of the independent variables to be computed by multiple
regression analysis.  These three-level compact orthogonal designs were con-
structed by extension of the method for constructing similar two-level designs
described by Youden [51].  A detailed discussion of the Phase 1 design, as an
illustration of the general class, is given in Appendix A.
     From the experimental data on each sample, characterizing quantities such
as  fiber number concentration, fiber mass concentration, mean fiber length,
etc., were computed.  These measured or estimated quantities are designated as
the dependent variables.  Some dependent variables were subjected to suitable
mathematical transformations far the usual purposes of linearization of the
effects of the independent variables, variance stabilization, and normalization
of  the distribution of  residuals.  The transformations applied include the
logarithmic, the  square root, and the arcsine square root  [55-57].  Table 3
lists a few representative dependent variables considered  in Phase 1.
     A stepwide least-square multiple regression method was used to construct
the equation relating each chosen dependent variable to the independent vari-
ables  [58-60].  A detailed discussion of the procedure and resulting equations
is  given in Appendix B.
FIVE PHASE PROGRAM
     We decided to study the selected 19 variables in five phases, each phase
using a fractional factorial design.
Phase 1
     In this phase, we  examined the procedures employed when no ashing and
resuspension were  undertaken and fibers were identified by morphology alone.
Twelve procedural  variables (see Table 4) were studied in  a plan of 27 tests.
The  12 variables comprise five variables of sample collection  (X.-X,.), four
variables of sample preparation (X,-X ), and three variables of sample examina-
tion (X-jQ-X-io)  *n  transraission electron microscope.  The compact notation of
the scheme is shown in Table 5.  The 12 independent variables are denoted by
^1~^12"   T^e numkers *n each row refer to the variable's value  (or level code)
for the particular combination.  Table 6 shows the same scheme in long notation
for easy recognition of variable level combinations.
                                      18

-------
                                   Table 3


                REPRESENTATIVE DEPENDENT VARIABLES IN PHASE 1
Variable                                  Definition
   Y         Mean Ln  (fiber width, ym)


   Y_        Mean Ln  (fiber length, ym)


   Yj.        Mean Ln  (aspect ratio)

                                         3
   Y         Mean Ln  (fiber volume, (ym) )

                                                           3
   YQ        Square root  (estimated number of fibers per cm  of air sampled)

                                                                        3
   Y -       Ln  (estimated mass  concentration of  fibers in the air, yg/m )

                                                                      2
   Y .       Square root  (estimated number of chrysotile fibers per cm  of
             filter)
                                                                      -9
   Y „       Ln  (estimated mass  concentration of chrysotile fibers, 10   gm per
    12       cm2 of  filter)
                                       19

-------
                                     Table 4
                       INDEPENDENT  VARIABLES, PHASE  1
Variable
INDEPENDENT VARIABLES OF FILTER LOADING
X-j Composition of Sample in
Aerosol Chamber
XT Concentration of Sample
on Filter
Xg Sampling Instrument
X4 Filter Type
X5 Pore Size, nominal

Levels and Codes
(1) 100% Chrysotile
(2) 60% Chrysotile
+ 40% Amphibole
(3) 70% Chrysotile
-i- 20% Amphibole
+ 10% Non-Asbestos Fiber
(1) Light
(2) Medium
(3) Heavy
(1) High Volume
(2) Personal
(1) Nuclepore
(2) Millipore
(1) 0.2 ym
(2) 0.4 ym
(3) 0.8 ym

XiL=-l XjQ= 1
xa= 1 X,Q= 1
XiL= 0 XiQ=-2
X2L=-1 X2Q= 1
X2L= 0 X2Q=-2
X2L= 1 X2Q= 1
X3Q=-2
X3Q= 1
X,,q=-2
X.,0- 1
X5L=-1 X5Q= 1
X5L= 0 X5Q=-2
X5L= 1 X5Q= 1
INDEPENDENT VARIABLES OF TEM GRID PREPARATION
)<6 Filter Side
Xy 2.3 mm Portion Location
Xg Use of Carbon Coating
Xg Transfer Method
INDEPENDENT VARIABLES OF TEM EXAMINATION
XIQ Magnification, nominal*
Xj} Grid Opening Location
X-J2 Choice of Fields
(1
(2
(1
(2
(3
Particle side down
Particle side up
Periphery
Mid-radius
Center
(1) Yes
(2) No
(1) Soxhlet Extraction 1 (short)
(2) Soxhlet Extraction 2 (long)
(3) Jaffe Method
(1) 5.000X (screen mag. 4.000X)
(2) 10.000X (screen mag. 8.000X)
(3) 20.000X (screen mag. 16.000X)
(1) Periphery
(2) Mid-radius
(3) Center
(1) Random choice of small fields
(2) Small fields, consecutive
(3) Entire grid opening as a field
X6Q= 1
X6Q=-2
X7L=-1 X7Q= 1
X7L= 0 X7Q=-2
X7L= 1 X7Q= 1
X8Q=-2
X8Q= 1
X9L=-1 X9Q= 1
X9L= 1 X9Q= 1
X9L= 0 X9Q=-2
X10L=-1 X10Q= 1
XI - n y n— 9
1 o L— U Jk\ o y~ -C.
X10L= 1 X10Q= 1
XnL=-l XnQ= 1
XuL= 0 XnQ=-2
XuL= 1 XnQ= 1
X12L=-1 X12Q= 1
Xi2L= 1 X12Q= 1
XJ2L= 0 X12Q=-2
*The actual magnification at the  fluorescent screen is somewhat smaller than the nominal or
 camera magnification, depending  upon the design  geometry of each  transmission electron
 microscope.
                                          20

-------
                  Table 5




PHASE 1 EXPERIMENT DESIGN  (COMPACT NOTATION)
Factor (Independent Variable)
Combination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
X
^,
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
^3
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
-5
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
'^7
3
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
3
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
3
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
X8
O
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
Xg
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
3
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
1
2
2
3
1
1
2
3
X10
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
%
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
-12
1
3
2
2
1
3
3
2
1
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
3
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
3
                       21

-------
                                          Table  6

                     PHASE 1 EXPERIMENTAL PLAN  (LONG NOTATION)

Samp 1 e
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Independent Variables
Xl
Compo.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
X2
Loading
Low
Low
Low
Med
Med
Med
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Med
Med
Med
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Med
Med
Med
High
High
High
X3
Sampler
P
P
P
HV
HV
HV
P
P
P
HV
HV
HV
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
HV
HV
HV
X4
NP/MP
M
M
M
N
N
N
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
N
N
N
M
M
M
M
M
M
X5
Pore
Size
0.22
0.45
0.8
0.2
0.4
0.8
0.22
0.45
0.8
0.22
0.45
0.8
0.22
0.45
0.8
0.2
0.4
0.8
0.2
0.4
0.8
0.22
0.45
0.8
0.22
0.45
0.8
X6
Particle
Side
Down/Up

—
Up
_„
-_
Up
__
—
Up
„_
Up

_-
Up
--
-_
Up

Up
--
--
Up

--
Up

—
X7
3 mm
Location
Ctr
Peri
MR
Peri
MR
Ctr
MR
Ctr
Peri
Ctr
Peri
MR
Peri
MR
Ctr
MR
"Ctr
Peri
Ctr
Peri
MR
Peri
MR
Ctr
MR
Ctr
Peri
X8
C-
Coat

—
Yes
	
Yes
--
Yes
—
—
	
Yes
--
Yes
--
—
	
—
Yes
Yes
--
--
-_
--
Yes
-_
Yes
_ _
X9
Filter
Remova 1
Sox 1
Sox 2
J
J
Sox 1
Sox 2
Sox 2
J
Sox 1
Sox 2
J
Sox 1
Sox 1
Sox 2
J
J
Sox 1
Sox 2
J
Sox 1
Sox 2
Sox 2
J
Sox 1
Sox 1
Sox 2
J
X10
Magnif i .
1.000X
10
5
20
10
5
20
10
5
20
20
10
5
20
10
5
20
10
5
5
20
10
5
20
10
5
20
10
Xll
Grid
Opening
Loc.
MR
Peri
Ctr
Ctr
MR
Peri
Peri
Ctr
MR
MR
Peri
Ctr
Ctr
MR
Peri
Peri
Ctr
MR
MR
Peri
Ctr
Ctr
MR
Peri
Peri
Ctr
MR
X12
Choice
of Field
Random
Full Grid •
Consecutive
Consecutive
Random
Full Grid
Full Grid
Consecutive
Random
Consecut ive
Random
Full Grid
Full Grid
Consecutive
Random
Random
Full Grid
Consecut ive
Full Grid
Consecut ive
Random
Random
Ful I Grid
Consecut ive
Consecut ive
Random
Full Grid
Footnotes:
  P  =  Personal
  HV =  High-volume
Ctr  = Center
Peri = Periphery
MR   = Mid-radius
Sox 1  - Short      C-Coat = Carbon Coat
Sox 2  = Long       M      - Millipore/Cellulose Acetate
J     = Jaffe      N      = Nuclepore/Polycarbonate

-------
Phase 2
     In phase 2, three variables, X^, Xg, and X   , were examined in nine tests.
The compact notation of the scheme  is shown  in Table  7.  The independent vari-
ables, their levels, and  coding  are also listed in Table 7.  The coding is
necessary to balance the  design  and facilitate the regression analysis.  Further
explanation may be found  in Appendix A.
Phase 3
     This phase was intended  for comparing two instruments used in the secondary
electron mode.  The JEOL  JSM  50A, an excellent scanning electron microscope,
and JEOL 100C, the latest scanning-transmission electron microscope, were eval-
uated in SEM mode using either morphology alone or in conjunction with elemental
analysis by X-ray probe.   Phase  3 also used  nine  tests.  The scheme is shown in
Table 8.
Phase 4
     Phase 4 provided data for examining effects  of ashing and redeposition pro-
cedures.  We examined four variables, X-,, X., ~, X . ,  and X   , in nine tests.
The compact designation of the scheme is illustrated  in Table 9.  The variable
names and different levels in each  and their coding are also listed in Table 9.
Phase 5
     In phase 5, we examined  the variables of the direct drop method being fol-
lowed at a few laboratories.  The method uses a liquid suspension (either a
water sample or resuspended ash  of  an air filter).  Instead of redepositing the
particles onto another filter (see  phase 4), a microdrop is withdrawn and de-
posited directly on a carbon-coated TEM grid and  allowed to dry.  Two common
ways of drying the drop are keeping the drop-side facing up or keeping the
drop-side facing down.  There have  been conflicing reports about the uniformity
of deposit on the 3 mm diameter  grid.  Hence, another variable evaluated in
this phase was the grid opening  location on  TEM grid  (X,-), i.e., peripheral
(level 1), mid-radious (level 2), and central locations (level 3).  The scheme
for phase 5 experiment and the orthogonal coding  are  given in Table 10.
                                      23

-------
                                  Table  7
                        PHASE 2  EXPERIMENT  DESIGN
Sample
Description
Code*
2113
2121
2132
2211
2222
2233
2312
2323
2331
Factors
^
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
(Independent
J^9-
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Variables)
X13-
3
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
Independent
  Variable
    Code
 Description.
of Variables
              Composition of Sample
              Transfer Method
              Identification Method
Levels
                   (1) Pure chrysotile
                   (2) Chrysotile plus amosite
                   (3) Chrysotile plus
                       crocidolite plus
                       wollastonite

                   (1) Soxhlet 1
                   (2) Soxhlet 1 with carbon
                       coating
                   (3) Jaffe

                   (1) Morphology plus
                       chemistry
                   (2) Morphology plus
                       electron diffraction
                   (3) Morphology plus
                       chemistry plus
                       electron diffraction
Codes
                    XiL=-l
                    XiL=  0   XiQ=-2
                    XiL=  1   XiQ=  1

                    X9L=-1   X9Q=  1

                    X9L=  0   X9Q=-2
                    X9L=  1   XsQ=  1


                    Xi3L=-l  X13Q= 1

                    X13L= 0  X13Q=-2
                    Xi3L
                                                                            Xi3Q
*First digit in the sample description code  shows  the phase number; second, third,
 and fourth digits  refer to the levels of independent variable used.
                                       24

-------
                                    Table 8

                           PHASE 3 EXPERIMENT DESIGN


Test
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Sample
Description
Code*
3142
3111
3142
3212
3242
3241
3341
3342
3312
Factors

Xl-
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
(Independent

X
Ljr-
4
1
4
1
4
4
4
4
1
Variables)

^1 8-
iCT^
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
Independent
  Variable
    Code
     1
   Description of Variables

Composition of Sample
              Identification Method
    X1_       Analytical Electron Microscope
     1 o
             Level
(1)  Pure chrysotile
(2)  Chrysotile plus amosite
(3)  Chrysotile plus
    crocidolite plus
    wollastonite

(1)  Morphology plus X-ray
    analysis
(4)  Morphology

(1)  JSM-50A
(2)  JEOL 100C
*First digit in the sample description code refers to the phase number; the
 second,  third, and fourth digits refer to the levels of the independent vari-
 ables used.
                                       25

-------
                                     Table 9

                            PHASE 4 EXPERIMENT DESIGN
Sample
Number
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
Sample
Description
Code*
42211
41112
42213
41221
42222
42123
42121
42222
41223


— t-6-
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
Factors (Independent

— t9-
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
Variables)

X14-
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2


JL^
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
 Independent
  Variable
    Code

    X16
     19
    X
     14
    X
     15
  Description of Variables

Filter Type
(both primary and secondary)

Ignition
Ashing
Bonification
       Levels
(1)  Millipore
(2)  Nuclepore

(1)  No
(2)  Yes

(1)  High temperature
(2)  Low temperature

(1)  Low energy
(2)  Medium energy
(3)  High energy
     Codes
X16Q=-2
Xi6Q= 1
   Q=-2
Xi9Q= 1

XmQ=-2
X1SL=-1  X15Q= 1
XisL= 0  Xi5Q=-2
XX5L= 1  XisQ= 1
*First digit of the sample description code refers to the phase number;  second,
 third, fourth, and fifth digits refer to the levels of the independent  variables
 used.
                                         26

-------
                               Table 10

                      PHASE  5 EXPERIMENT DESIGN
Sample
Number
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
Sample
Description
Code*
523
522
521
513
512
511
Factors (Independent
X,
2
2
2
1
1
1
Variables)
xn
i±
3
2
1
3
2
1
Independent
Variable
Code
X6
o

X11
J.JL

Description
of Variables
Orientation of drop
during drying on
TEM grid
Radial Location of
Opening on TEM grid


Levels
(1) Drop side up
(2) Drop side down

(1) Center
(2) Mid-radius
(3) Periphery

Codes
X6= 1
X6— 1

V T T V ^_> 1
AH L=— 1 AH (}— 1
XnL= 0 XnQ=-2
XnL= 1 Xn Q= 1
*First digit of the sample description code refers to the phase number;
 second and third digits refer to the levels of the independent variables
 used.
                                   27

-------
                                 SECTION 6
                             EXPERIMENTAL WORK

THE PREPARATION OF LABORATORY FILTERS OF CONTROLLED ASBESTOS LOADING IN PHASE 1
Introduction
     Phase 1 of the sratistically designed  study to evaluate the electron micro-
scope analytical methodology for determining asbestos required that filters be
prepared under controlled conditions to obtain three different asbestos  concen-
trations.  Both polycarbonate (Nuclepore)  and cellulose acetate (Millipore)
filters, with pore sizes of 0.2, 0.4, and 0.8 ym, were used and samples were
collected using both high volume samplers [61] (with 20 cm x 25 cm filters) and
personal samplers [62] (with 3.5 cm diameter filters).
     Filters could be prepared in several ways,  preferably by simultaneous sam-
pling using different filter types, pore sizes,  and samplers.  Filters could be
prepared by:
     • taking samples close to a natural source
     • preparing solutions of known asbestos concentration by ultrasonic
       treatment of water and filtering from liquid suspension
     • preparing asbestos aerosols and sampling from an aerosol cloud of
       calculated concentration
     Sampling from a natural asbestos source, for example, an asbestos products
factory, would be the most convenient, but  unfortunately, it has the serious
disadvantage that the concentration of the  source is not known.
     Filter samples could be prepared from liquid suspension of known concen-
tration of asbestos minerals.  However, the disadvantage with this method  is
that the deposition of fibers from water suspension onto a filter may not  be
equivalent to that obtained from an aerosol cloud.
     Simultaneous sampling from an aerosol cloud of known concentration appears
the best since it simulates normal operating  conditions while allowing  some
control of the aerosol concentration.

                                     28

-------
Experimental
The Aerosol Chamber—
     A spherical chamber fabricated  from welded steel plate with a diameter
of 5.5 m was utilized to obtain an aerosol cloud.  The volume of the chamber is
    3
86 m .  The inside of the chamber is coated with an epoxy-phenolic material
(Plasite 7122) to prevent corrosion.  The chamber can be cleaned by a hot
water spray to wash down the walls,  and by a high volume extraction system to
purge the chamber through an absolute filter device at the rate of 12 air
changes per hour.
     Inside the chamber there is a catwalk as shown in Figure 2a.  Three high-
volume samplers and six personal samplers were mounted on the catwalk.  The
aerosol cloud entered the chamber from the generator located outside the
chamber.  A fan inside the chamber circulated the air to ensure a uniformly
mixed aerosol.
Ultrasonic Treatment to Break Fibers to a Sufficiently Fine Size—
     The UICC asbestos minerals have a very coarse particle size, which is
unsuitable for charging in an aerosol cloud.  Three ultrasonic devices were
tested to determine their efficiency in breaking up asbestos into fibers under
10 ym in length.  They were:
     • Ultra-Sonic Industries  - System Forty
                                 80 Watts Bath Type
     • Polytron Cell Disruptor - PT10
                                 5000 Watts with High Speed Agitator
     • Branson Sonifier        - W 185C
                                 100 Watts Horn Type
     Tests were conducted by weighing out a small quantity of asbestos and
suspending it in distilled water to give an asbestos concentration of about
0.3% by weight.  Aerosol OT was added as a dispersing aid at a concentration
of about 0.2%.  Ultrasonics were applied,for time periods of 5, 10, 20, and
30 minutes.   Using each device, the sample was then diluted to a concentration
of 0.03% with distilled water.
     The Branson Sonifier was the only unit found suitable for achieving small
enough fiber lengths in chrysotile asbestos.  By varying the time of the ultra-
sonic treatment, the chrysotile asbestos could be reduced to any fiber length
desired.   The most satisfactory chrysotile dispersion was produced by giving a

                                      29

-------
        Aerosol
         Inlet
 Access
 Flanges

Control
 Panel
                      Air  Circulatin
                      Fan
                            High-volume
                              Samplers
                                         Structural
                                          Support
Purge Air Out
               Figure  2a:   Top view  and  side view of aerosol  chamber
                           showing location of apparatus.
                 Test
                Aerosol
                            Particle Charge Neutralizer
       Air at
       45  psig *
             Dryer
                                              Valve
                                    Filter
                         Pressure
                         Regulator
                                      HXH
Dilution
Flowmeter
                                          Atomizer
                                         Flowmeter
    Atomizer
                                                                     Impactor
                 Figure 2b.  Flow diagram of aerosol  generator
                                         30

-------
45 minute treatment at 100 watts power to 250 mg of asbestos suspended in 150 ml
of water with 2% of Aerosol OT added as a dispersing agent.  The results of the
treatment were checked by optical and electron microscopes.
     The Branson unit was found to be less effective with amosite asbestos and
fiber glass.  A series of hand-grinding experiments were performed using an
agate pestle and mortar.  A techniques was developed which les to satisfactory
dispersion of both amosite and fiber glass.  It consisted of wet hand grinding
a 100 mg quantity of fiber in a few drops of 1:1 solution of water and Aerosol OT
for 30 minutes.
Aerosol Generation—
     The Sierra Instrument Company's Model 133G Fluid Atomization Aerosol Gener-
ator utilizes air-blast atomization and inertial impaction to produce aerosols.
                                               9
It could produce particles at rates of up to 10  particles per second.  The
droplet size was variable from 0.03 to 3 ym.
     The generator is schematically illustrated in Figure 2b.  It consisted of
a dryer, a pressure regulator, an absolute filter, an adjustable valve, two pre-
cision flowmeters, a fluid atomizer, an impactor, and an ionizer.
     High pressure air was supplied to the generator at a minimum pressure of
45 psig.  The air passed through a chemical dryer and a pressure regulator
which reduced the pressure to 35 psig.  The air then flowed through an absolute
filter and was subsequently divided into two fractions:  the atomizer air and
the dilution air.
     The atomizer air flowed through a flowmeter and a Collison-type atomizer.
As the air passed through the nozzles of the atomizer, it produced a spray of
the suspension directed against a baffle.  The spray was then carried by the
air through an impactor where the large droplets were removed, leaving an
aerosol of a narrow size distribution.  The remaining droplets then flowed to
a mixing tee located upstream of the ionizer.
     After flowing through the filter, the dilution air flowed through a manually
adjusted valve.  It then passed through a flowmeter and into the mixing tee.
From the mixing tee, the diluted aerosol flowed into the ionizer where it was
mixed with bipolar ions and the solvent evaporated.  The aerosol was then
exhausted through the outlet located on the side of the generator housing.
Care was taken to adjust the fiber concentration to a point where each droplet
                                      31

-------
 formed would contain 0 or 1 fiber the vast majority of the times.  This precau-
 tion  is  required to minimize agglomeration or clumping of the fibers as the
 water evaporated.  The ionizer employed a radioactive source (1 milli-curie of
 Krypton  85 gas) to neutralize static charge on the particles.
      During preliminary runs, contamination of the aerosol chamber by the high-
 volume samplers was observed.  The requirement that high-volume sampling time
 be  kept  below a total of one hour, coupled with the failure of aerosol genera-
 tors  producing larger droplets to provide an adequately dispersed aerosol, led
 to  a  modification to the aerosol generator.  Provision was made to pump asbes-
 tos slurry, whose concentration was adjusted to compensate for the fiber loss
 and evaporative water loss, in the atomizer unit.  The Sierra Atomizer was
 operated for periods of 16 to 80 hours on a continuous basis using this make-up
 system.
      This method was used since the fiber sizes were small, enough to remain
 in  suspension indefinitely with minimal air recirculation.  Trial and error
 tests were necessary to control the desired concentration of fiber loading on
 the filter.  It was found that the Sierra Fluid Atomization Aerosol Generator
 was not  capable of delivering the airborne concentrations required in a few
 hours.
      Experiments to use other aerosol atomizers for obtaining higher concen-
 trations in a short time proved futile because of unpredictable dispersion of
 fibers.  Such air samples would be unsuitable for good electron microscopy work.
      The problem remained on how to obtain a reasonably high aerosol concentra-
 tion  in  the chamber while at the same time ensuring the quality of the dispersion.
 We  settled upon a procedure that assumed a very low decay constant for the con-
 centration of the aerosol in the chamber and involved operating the Sierra aero-
 solizer  for long periods (up to 95 hours) to build up a suitable concentration.
 The assumption was deemed reasonable since the gravitational sedimentation of
 the ultra-fine particles produced was negligible and the large diameter  (18  foot)
 chamber  gave a low wall effect.  Thus, all the aerosol dispersions were finally
made with one instrument, the Sierra Fluid Atomizer.
Details of Experimental Work in Phase 1 Samples Prepared in Chamber
     In all,  27 samples were prepared as detailed in Table 6.  Each sample was
unique and had to be individually prepared.
                                      32

-------
              -'                                                  o
     The effective area of the 37 mm personal samplers was 6.7 cm  versus
        2
406.5 cm  area of 20 cm x 25 cm filter in high-volume samplers.  Also, the
difference in flow rates of the two devices was quite significant.  The per-
                 
-------
 accounts  for  the distribution of  sampling  times  seen  in Table  11  for  the high-
 volume samplers.
 SAMPLE PREPARATION FOR TEM
      The  sample preparations involved numerous subprocedures as described
 below.
 Carbon Coating
      Filters  needing  carbon coating  (independent variable Xg,  level 1) were
 placed in a vacuum evaporator and given a  thin (40 nm thick) coating  of  carbon.
 Cutting Out 2.3 mm Diameter Segment
      Small discs were cut from each  filter according  to the variable  X7
 (level 1  - peripheral location, level 2 - mid-radius, and level 3 - central
 location).  A standard 2.3 mm punch  was used for this purpose.
 Particle  Transfer Method
      Three methods of filter dissolution were used.  Variable  Xg,  level  1 is
 the  Soxhlet Extraction of short duration,  level 2 is  the Soxhlet  Extraction of
 long duration, and level 3 is the Jaffe method [63].  The solvent used depended
 on the type of filter; acetone for cellulose acetate  and chloroform for  poly-
 carbonate.  Duration  for filter dissolution also depended on type of  filter.
 Short and long durations were four hours and eight hours for the  acetone extrac-
 tion of cellulose acetate and eight  hours to 16 hours for the  chloroform extrac-
 tion of polycarbonate filters.  The  Jaffe method used a 24 hour duration.
 Filter Topside (Particle Side) Orientation
      Variable X, had  two possibilities.  Levels 1 and 3 refer  to  particle side
 down (i.e., during filter dissolution, the particles  should be in direct con-
 tact  with the carbon-coating of the  grid) and level 2 referred to keeping par-
 ticle side  up (not in direct contact with the carbon-coating of TEM grid).
 EXAMINING SAMPLES IN TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPE
      The study of samples in transmission electron microscope  involves the
 following important considerations.
Grid Opening Location
     After positioning a grid in the transmission electron microscope, an area
of about 2 mm diameter was available for examination.  The first  step was to
                                      34

-------
                                                                 Table 11
                                     EXPERIMENTAL SCHEME FOR SIMULATED AIR SAMPLES FOR PHASE  1
Ui

Run
No.
1








2








3









Sample
No,
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Fiber
Composition3
C
c
C
c
c
c
c
c
c
C J- A
C + A
C + A
C + A
C + A
C + A
C + A
C + A
C + A
C + A + F
C + A + F
C + A + F
C + A + F
C + A + F
C + A + F
C + A + F
C + A + F
C + A + F

Sampler
Typeb
P
P.
P
Hi~vol
Hi-vol
Hi-vol
P
P
P
Hi-vol
Hi-vol
Hi-vol
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
Hi-vol
Hi-vol
Hi-vol

Filter
Tvpec
M
M
M
N
N
N
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
N
N
N
M
M
M
M
M
M

Pore
Size, um
0.22
0.45
0.80
0.2
0.4
0.8
0.22
0.45
0.80
0.22
0.45
0.80
0.22
0.45
0.80
0.2
0.4
0.8
0.2
0.4
0.8
0.22
0.45
0.80
0.22
0.45
0.80
Air
Volume
Filtered, I
32
32
32
9116
9200
8400
512
512
512
2080
2030
2040
124
124
124
513
513
513
7.6
7.6
7.6
29.2
29.2
29.2
7920
7701
9167

Sampling
Time , min
16
16
16
14
13
11.2
256
256
256
5.25
4.5
- 3.0
62
62
62
258
258
258
3.8
3.8
3.8
14.6 -
14.6
14.6
20
17
13.5
Expected Mass Concentration
of Fibers on Filter, vig/cm^
Chrysotile
1.385
1.385
1.385
6.503
6.563
5.993
22.161
22.161
22.161
1.484
1.448
1.455
5.367
5.367
5.367
22.204
22.204
22.204
1.406
1.406
1.406
5.404
5.404
5.404
24.159
23.491
27.963
Amphibole









0.987
0.964
0.968
3.572
3.572
3.572
14.777
14.777
14.777
0.401
0.401
0.401
1.543
1.543
1.543
6.897
6.706
7.983
Fiberglass


















0.201
0.201
0.201
0.771
0.771
0.771
3.448
3.353
3.992

Anticipated Mass Concentration
of Fibers in Chamber, Ug/m3
Chrysotile
290







Chrysotile Amphibole »-,.
290 193







Chrysotile Amphibole
1240 354

Fiberglass
177




               C         = chrysotile
               C + A     = chrysotile + amosite
               C + A + F = chrysotile + amosite + fiberglass
                                                                 P = Personal
M = Millipore
N = Nuclepore

-------
reduce the> magnification to a minimum (which was about 90X on the JEOL 100C
transmission microscope) and to select a grid opening from central, mid-radius,
or peripheral location as called for by the scheme (see Table 6).
Magnificat ion
     The required grid opening was brought to the center of the screen and the
electron microscope was adjusted to 5,000, 10,000, or 20,000 nominal magnifi-
cation, again as required by the scheme (see Table 6).
Choice of  Fields
     In variable X  , the field of view could be chosen as a rectangular area
 (of  the tiltable section) of the fluorescent screen and these fields could be
either selected in a random fashion (level 1) or in a consecutive  (adjacent)
fashion (level 2).  Alternately, the entire grid opening could be  treated as
one  single field of view (level 3).  For scanning the entire grid, the area was
scanned from the top corner sideways until the grid bar  was  reached.  The
field was  displaced upwards slightly and again scanned sideways until the op-i
posite boundary of the grid opening was reached.  This was repeated until the
entire grid opening area was scanned.  The levels for this variable were ex-
plained in the overall scheme  (see Table 6).
DATA RECORDING
                                                                                f
     All particles with an aspect ratio 3:1 and greater and having substantially
parallel sides were considered as fibers.  The length and width of each fiber
were estimated in mm by visual comparison with graduated circles on the fluores-
cent screen and all fibers visible in each field of view were counted and se-
quentially numbered.  No attempt was made to recognize each type of mineral
fibers; only a computed average density was assumed for all fibers in each
sample.  For fibers extending beyond the perimeter of the field of view, the
length within the field of view was estimated and the fiber was treated as a
half fiber for fiber concentration estimation.
EXPERIMENTAL WORK IN PHASE 2:  STUDY OF FIBER IDENTIFICATION METHOD
     The main objective of this phase was to evaluate the three methods of
fiber identification;  (a) morphology in conjunction with X-ray analysis,
(b)  morphology in conjunction with electron diffraction, and  (c) morphology  in
conjunction with both electron diffraction and X-ray analysis.
                                      36

-------
Filter Preparation
     Polycarbonate filters of 47 mm diameter and 0.4 ym pore size were used.
Known volumes of standard liquid suspensions of UICC asbestos minerals were fil-
tered through these filters.  Filter 1 represented only chrysotile.  Filter 2
represented a mixture of chrysotile plus an amphibole  (amosite).  Filter 3
represented a mixture of chrysotile, an amphibole (crocidolite), and a contam-
inant mineral (wollastonite).
Particle Transfer Method
     All methods used chloroform as the solvent for dissolution of the filter.
Method 1 consisted of Soxhlet extraction for eight hours of the polycarbonate
filter (without carbon-coating).  Method 2 consisted of Soxhlet extraction for
eight hours of the same polycarbonate filters coated previously with carbon.
Method 3 consisted of first  carbon-coating the filter and then Jaffe washing
for 24 hours.
     Since these three methods were applied to the same three initial polycar-
bonate filters, this scheme was expected to give a close comparison among the
methods of particle transfer.
Electron Microscopic Examination
EM Parameter Selection—
     On the JEOL 100C electron microscope, the various parameters, such as
accelerating voltage, beam spot size, tilt angle, screen magnification, etc.,
could be adjusted to obtain the best performance for achieving specific infor-
mation.  Morphological examination and electron diffraction analysis were done
at 0° tilt angle and 100 kv accelerating voltage, whereas the X-ray analysis
was conducted at 40° tilt angle and 40 kv accelerating voltage.  The scheme for
different microscope parameters is shown in Table 12.
EXPERIMENTAL WORK IN PHASE 3:  EVALUATING A TEM AND AN SEM
     The main objective of this phase was to compare two electron microscopes
used in the secondary electron emission mode.
Preparation of Filters
     The filters used in this study were 0.4 ym pore size polycarbonate, pre-
pared by filtering liquid suspension.  Sample 1 referred to chrysotile alone,
Sample 2 referred to chrysotile plus an amphibole asbestos (amosite), and
                                      37

-------
UJ
00
                                                           Table  12

                    SCHEME OF ELECTRON MICROSCOPE PARAMETERS FOR FIBER IDENTIFICATION METHODS  IN  PHASE 2
VARIABLE
COMBINATION
CODE

X.
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3

2Lx
i
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3

X.
3
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
Ace.
TT n ,_
Volt
KV
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
MORPHOLOGY
Beam
bpOt
Size*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•»*• •
Magni-
fication
160,000
160,000
160,000
160,000
160,000
160,000
160,000
160,000
160,000
Tilt
Angle
Degree
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ELECTRON DIFFRACTION
Ace.
Volt
KV
100
-
100
_
100
100
100
100
-
Beam
Spot
Size*
1
-
1
_
1
1
1
1
-
Camera
Length
cm
20
-
20
-
20
20
20
20
-
Tilt
Angle
Degree
0
-
0
-
0
0
0
0
-
Ace.
Volt
KV
40
40
-
40
-
40
-
40
40
X-RAY' FLUORESCENCE
Beam
C* 4_
Spot
Size*
3
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
3
»* j
Magni-
fication
44,000
44,000
-
44,000
-
44,000
-
44,000
44,000
Tilt
A«rv1 ft
Angle
Degrees
40
40
-
40
-
40
• -
40
40
            * Beam spot size refers to a setting on  the JEOL 100C electron microscope.  Spot size refers to a large size
              and spot size 3 refers to a significantly smaller size beam.

-------
Sample 3, to a mixture of chrysotile, amphibole (crocidolite), and a contam-
inant (wollastonite).
Particle Transfer Method
     All filters were prepared by Soxhlet condensation washing for eight hours
using chloroform as a solvent.  The carbon-coated TEM grids used were nickel
marker (finder) grids to facilitate examining the same grid opening in the
two instruments.
EM Instrument Parameters
     The electron microscope parameters were chosen such that the highest capa-
bility of each instrument was not exceeded.  The comparison was done at 10,OOOX,
which represented the highest usable magnification in JSM 50A scanning electron
microscope.
   Instrument
Identification
    Method
Accelerating
   Voltage
     KV
Tilt Angle
  degrees     Magnification
JEOL 100C TEM

JEOL-JSM 50A SEM

Morphology
Morphology +
X-ray
Morphology
Morphology +
X-ray
100
40
40
40
0
35
5
20
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
     Specific grid openings were examined in the two instruments in succession.
Electron Microscope Examination
     Morphological identification in secondary electron imaging was based on the
fiber dimensions rather than the internal, or surface structure, because of the
difficulty in focusing the image.  The focusing difficulty was due partly to the
movement of fiber images under the beam because the fibers acquired electrical
charge.  In the JEOL 100C instrument, a tilted specimen was more difficult to
focus because of the height differences created by tilting the grid.
                                       39

-------
     The sequential image formation, as observed on the CRT screen in the
 scanning mode, was strenuous on the eye.  Thus, scanning a grid opening while
 watching the secondary electron image required a meticulous effort to avoid
 double counting.  It was found that the number of fibers recognized in a sec-
 ondary electron image  was  smaller than those from a transmission scanning elec-
 tron image of the same field of view.  However, since the scanning transmission
 mode is not available on most common SEM microscopes, only secondary electron
 imaging was used for the purposes of comparison between the JSM 50A and JEOL
 100C.  In the morphological identification method, there were no special dif-
 ferences between amphibole fibers and wollastonite and, hence, this classifica-
 tion was subjective and was based on the observed chunkier appearance of
 wollastonite.
     In the identification based on both morphology and X-ray analysis, emphasis
 was placed on the X-ray spectrum information.  Interpretation was qualitative
 and, hence, subjective.  The presence of Si and Fe was interpreted to mean
 amosite or crocidolite, while the presence of Si and Ca was interpreted as in-
 dicating wollastonite, and the presence of Si and Mg was interpreted as chrysotile.
 (A rigorous and quantitative analysis should consider the relative proportion of
 these elements also as described by Millette [47]).  In general, the X-ray count
 rate was quite small and, hence, the X-ray peaks were also small.  Fibers which
 did not given recognizable X-ray peaks were classified as ambiguous.
     The sequence of examining samples was random to avoid bias.
 EXPERIMENTAL WORK IN PHASE 4:  ASHING AND BONIFICATION
 Filter Preparation
     Twelve membrane filters, eight polycarbonate, 0.2 ym pore size, and four
 cellulose acetate, 0.45 ym pore size, were used separately to filter a standard
 chrysotile suspension.  The nominal amount of chrysotile  (0.13 x 10   grams) was
                                                                               2
 deposited by filtering on 37 mm diameter filters  (with effective area of 9.6 cm )
                                                              Q      2
 to achieve a calculated chrysotile concentration of 13.5 x 10   gm/cm  .  After
 filtration, the filters were stored in disposable petri dishes and  air-dried in
 the clean work bench.
     Six of the polycarbonate and three of the cellulose  acetate  filters were
 cut in half for ashing and sonification tests.  Samples on polycarbonate mem-
brane and one cellulose acetate membrane were transferred  to  200-mesh carbon-
coated copper grids to serve as control standards.  Transfer  to  the TEM grids

                                      40

-------
was accomplished using the Jaffe washer method with chloroform (for polycar-
bonate) or acetone (for cellulose acetate) as solvents.

Ashing and Sonification Procedures

Preignition—

     Nine filter samples were rolled and placed with the fiber side facing the

wall in 25 mm diameter pyrex test tubes.  Preignition of three filters (two
polycarbonate and one cellulose acetate) was accomplished by moistening the

filters with 95% ethyl alcohol and igniting the filter by heating the pyrex
tube (without an open flame on the filter) prior to completion of ashing.

     Two more filters (one polycarbonate and one cellulose acetate) were pre-
pared directly  (without the ashing step).  Details of the scheme for phase 4
samples are summaried in Table 13.

Ashing—

     Three different ashing techniques were used:

     1.   Three samples, including the preignited cellulose acetate, placed
          in separate 25 mm diameter pyrex test tubes and placed in a muffle
          furnace at room temperature.  The temperature was then slowly raised
          to 500°C and held overnight.

     2.   Two samples in 25 mm diameter pyrex test tubes were ashed using
          nascent oxygen generated low-temperature asher (Model 302 LTA sup-
          plied by LFE Corporation, Waltham, MA).  The asher was operated at
          50 watts and ashing continued overnight.

     3.   The four remaining samples were also ashed in the LTA using a slow
          start of 25 watts for the first half-hour, and completed by 2^ hours
          at 50 watts.  It was observed that the majority of the membrane was
          ashed in the first half hour at low power.

Ultrasonic Dispersion—

     After the ashing treatments, three different levels of dispersion were

applied.  In each case, the glass tube containing the ash was filled with dis-

tilled water containing 1% Aerosol OT as a dispersion aid.

     1.   Low energy ultrasonic treatment was applied from a normal laboratory
          ultrasonic cleaning bath (e.g., Bendix UTL-4B-1).  The sample tube
          was placed in the neck of a 250 ml water filled conical flask such
          that it was held upright.  Ultrasonic energy was applied for
          15 minutes to disperse the ash.

     2.    Medium and high energy ultrasonic dispersion was applied from a
          Branson Sonifier (Model 200).  Fitted with a variable power supply,
                                      41.

-------
                                                  Table 13

                              DETAILS OF THE ASHING PARAMETERS USED IN PHASE 4
Sample
Number
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
Sample
Description
Code*
42211
41112
42213
41221
42222
42123
42121
42222
41223


Initial
Filter
NP
MP
NP
MP
NP
NP
NP
NP
MP
NP
MP
Preignition Ashing Treatment
No HT 500 °C Overnight
Yes HT 500°C Overnight
No HT 500°C Overnight
No LT 25 watts-30 min
50 watts-150 min
No LT 25 watts-30 min
50 watts-150 min
Yes LT 25 watts-30 ijiin
50 watts-150 min
Yes LT Same as above
No LT 25 watts-30 min
50 watts-150 min
No LT 25 watts-30 min
50 watts-150 min


Ultrasonic Treatment
L Bath 15 min
M Branson Unit
35 watts-2 min
H Branson Unit
65 watts-2 min
L Bath 15 min
M Branson Unit
35 watts-2 min
H Branson Unit
65 watts-2 min
L Bath 15 min
M Branson Unit
35 watts-2 min
H Branson Unit
65 watts-2 min


Final
Filter
NP
MP
NP
MP
NP
NP
NP
NP
MP


*First digit of the sample  description  code  refers to the phase number; second, third, fourth, and
 fifth digits refer to  the  levels  of  independent variables used.

-------
          this unit supplied ultrasonic vibrations at 20,000 cps via a microtip
          probe which was immersed in the suspension.
     3.   Medium level energy was applied by using the Branson sonifier (Model
          200) (equipped with a microtip probe) at its lowest setting (No. 1)
          for a period of two minutes.  The energy was measured at 35 x^ratts of
          output power.  High energy was applied at the highest allowable set-
          ting (No. 7) again for a period of two minutes.  The output power was
          measured at 65 watts.
     After the ultrasonics had been applied, the probe was washed and the wash-
ings were collected in the sample tube.  Between samples, the probe was cleaned
by operating it three times in distilled water containing Alconox detergent,
then rinsing four times in filtered distilled water.
     The sample from each of the dispersion experiments was filtered through a
25 mm  filter of the same type and pore size as the starting filter.  The filter
was dried and stored in a disposable petri dish in a clean work bench.
Particle Transfer Method—
     Grid preparation was accomplished using the Jaffe washer method (without
carbon-coating of filters) with analytical grade chloroform as the solvent for
the Nuclepore membranes and analytical grade acetone for the Millipore membranes.
The apparatus arranged in a clean air bench consisted of a glass petri dish con-
taining a stack of five microscope slides with a strip of Whatman filter paper
laid over the slides.  Solvent was gently poured into the dish to bring the
level to the top of the slides.
     A 3 mm copper grid, carbon side up, was placed on the Whatman filter.  A
3 mm disc cut from the membrane filters could then be gently placed (particle
side down) on top of the grid.  Solvent was added dropwise to restore the sol-
vent level as required.  The filters took 24-72 hours to completely dissolve.
The dish was covered.
Transmission Electron Microscopy—
     The grids resulting from these experiments were studied using a JEM-7
Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) operated at 100 kv and at a nominal
magnification of 10,OOOX.
     Each sample was mounted and examined using TEM.  A number of  grids suffi-
cient to exceed a count of 100 fibers were examined.  Data taken were the number
of grid openings examined and the diameter and length of each fiber observed.
                                      43

-------
Only undamaged grid openings were counted and each grid opening examined was
surveyed completely.
EXPERIMENTAL WORK IN PHASE 5:  STUDY OF DIRECT DROP METHOD
     The objective of this phase was to study the direct drop method of prepara-
tion of TEM grids from liquid suspensions.
     Preliminary experiments had shown a 5 y& droplet to be of appropriate size
for coverage of a standard 200-mesh carbon-coated electron microscope grid, and
a suspension was prepared such that a 5 y& drop would contain sufficient chryso-
                                                                        2
tile asbestos fibers to give loading equivalent to a 10 nanograms per cm  filter
loading.  The same base chrysotile stock suspension used in phases 2 and 4 was
used.
     The grids were mounted on a 2.5 cm x 7.5 cm glass microscope slide using
double-stick tape.  The droplets were applied with a 5 y£ syringe from the
freshly prepared suspension.  Four grids were used, two of which were allowed
to dry in an inverted position, and two as deposited.  The grids were prepared
in a clean work bench and were covered during the drying process.
     Grid openings located near the center, mid-radius, and periphery of the
droplet were examined and fiber counts and size distribution measured using
a JEM-7 TEM microscope at the same conditions used in phase 4.
                                      44

-------
                                  SECTION 7
                      RESULTS AND DISCUSSION OF PHASE  1
INTRODUCTION
     Phase 1 represented the largest body of experimental data in this multi-
phase program.  These data were analyzed in a variety of ways to extract rele-
vant information for evaluating 12 variables.  It was necessary to decide on
specific criteria to be used in determining which variables were important and
which levels were desirable.
CRITERIA SELECTED
     The following four criteria were selected:
     1.    Conformance to the Poisson distribution.
     2.    Precision in fiber count per field of view.
     3.    Number concentration of chrysotile fibers per unit volume of air
          sampled.
     4.    Mass concentration of chrysotile fibers per unit volume of air sampled.
     Criteria 1 and 2 refer to fiber frequency distribution characteristics.
Criteria 3 and 4 refer to detection and estimation of number and mass of chryso-
tile fibers in air samples.
SUMMARY  OF PHASE 1 RESULTS
     Table 14 summarizes the data from Phase 1.  The various entries are as
follows:
     Column 1 lists the combination code (or sample number)
     Colume 2 lists the number of fibers counted
     Column 3 lists the number of fields examined
     Column 4 lists the mean number of fibers per field of view
     Column 5 lists the area of each field of view
                                      45

-------
                                Table  14




                        SUMMARY OF PHASE 1 DATA
1
Data Base
and Sample NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
41
(Repl icate of 1)
34
(Dupl icate of 4)
44
(Repl icate of 4)
36*
(Dupl icate of 6)
120
(Dupl icate of 20)
121
(Dupl icate of 21)
2
No. of Fibers
Counted
144
211
164
223
201
178
269
237
221
60
203
210
695
139
208
218
218
200
196
24
26
34
227
201
169
205
249

215

200

206

64

33

35
3
No. of Fields
200
12
211
46
26
4
1
4
72
276
108
8
1
200
19
17
2
7
15
280
200
200
4
186
204
140
7

75

39

21

200

220

221
4
Mean No. of
Fibers/Field
0.72
17.55
0.78
4.85
7.72
44.50
269.0
59.3
3.06
0.216
1.88
26.25
695-0
0.695
10.95
12.8
109.0
28.5
13.06
0.086
0.13
0.17
56.8
1.08
0.827
1.462
35.6

2.86

5.12

9.8

0.32

0.15

0.158
5
Area of
each Field
x 10~6 cm2
1.0
72.0
0.25
1.0
4.0
72.0
72.0
4.0
0.25
0.25
1.0
72.0
72.0
1.0
4.0
0.25
72.0
4.0
72.0
0.25
1.0
4.0
72.0
1.0
4.0
0.25
72.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.25

0.25

1.0
6
No. of
Fibers/cm^
x 10°
0.72
0.244
3.10
4.85
1.93
0.62
3.74
14.82
12.25
0.862
1.88
0.364
9.67
0.695
2.74
51.2
1.515
7-12
0.181
0.344
0.13
0.042
0.79
1.08
0.207
5.86
0.494

2.86

5.12

9.8

1.28

0.60

0.158
Small fields of view were chosen in a consecutive sequence.
                                     46

-------
     Column 6 lists the number of fibers per square cm of the filter
STATISTICAL DISTRIBUTION TESTS
Distribution of Fibers in a Microscopic Field of View
     Since, in an electron microscope method, only a very small area of the
sample is examined and an assumption is made that the area examined is repre-
sentative of the entire sample for computing the average fiber concentration
and fiber characteristics, it is important to check whether this assumption is
statistically sound.  This is done by comparing the variation of fiber distri-
bution with a Poisson distribution model.
Poisson Distribution Tests
     An analysis of the Phase 1 data was performed to determine whether the
variation in the observed numbers of fibers per field in the various samples
was in accordance with the Poisson distribution, and if not what the nature of
the departure was.  The Poisson sequence for the expected numbers of fields
containing 0, 1, 2, . . . fibers is

                     (F)(e~X)(l, A, \2/2l, A3/3I, . . .)
where F is the total number of fields and X is the mean number of fibers per
field.  It is considered desirable that the Poisson model hold, since this is
an indication of truly random sampling, and simple methods of establishing con-
fidence intervals for the mean number of fibers per unit volume of air can be
applied.
     To investigate this question, 21 statistical tests were made, as summarized
in Table 15.  The data for each test consisted of the fiber counts per field
that were recorded during the EM examination of a particular Phase 1 sample or,
in three instances, a duplicate pair of samples.  The duplicate pairs of samples
were:  4 and 34; 20 and 120; 21 and 121.  A pair consisted of different 2.3 mm
diameter portions of the same filter.  It was shown that the two samples of
each pair were in good agreement, and therefore the counts were combined for the
present purpose.
     Each set of test data was analyzed by means of computer program POISSON-1
written at IIT Research Institute for the purpose of determining the goodness
of fit of the distribution.  The listing of this program is given in Appendix  C.
The printouts for two illustrative samples, 1 and 26, and presented in Appendix C.
                                      47

-------
                                                      Table 15
                 TESTS FOR APPLICABILITY OF THE POISSON DISTRIBUTION TO NUMBER OF  FIBERS PER FIELD
00
Test
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Samples in
Data Base
1
2
3
4 & 34 f
5
9
10
11
14
15
16
19
20 & 120 f
21 & 121 f
22
24
25
26
36
41 (Repl.of
44 (Repl,of
Size of Field
cm2 x 10-6
1.0
72.0
0.25
1.0
4.0
0.25
0.25
1.0
1.0
4.0
0.25
72.0
0.25
1.0
4.0
1.0
4.0
0.25
0.25
1) 1.0
4) 1.0
No. of
Fields,
F
200
12
211
85
26
72
276
108
200
19
17
15
498
420
200
188
203
140
215
75
21
No, of
Fibers
144
210
164
423
201
221
60
203
139
208
218
196
57
61
34
201
169
205
64
215
206
Mean No,
Fibers per
Field, A
0.72
17.50
0.78
4.98
7.73
3.07
0.22
1.90
0.70
10.95
12.82
13.07
0.11
0.15
0.17
1.07
0.83
1.46
0.30
2.87
9.81
Degrees
of
Freedom
2
1
2
7
4
5
1
4
2
2
3
2
1
1
1
3
2
3
1
5
2
Chi-
Square
30.54
7.69
11.84
21.83
1.45
120.33
16.19
8.81
137.02
2.46
1.95
3.35
26.80
6.72
35.46
7.61
114.44
3.23
10.73
16.75
6.89
Good Fit
to
Probability Poisson
.001>P
.01>P>.001 (*)
.001>P
.01>P>.001 (*)
.9>P>.8 *
.001>P
.001>P
.10>P>.05 *
.001>P
.3>P>.2 *
.7>P>.5 *
.2>P>.1 *
.001>P
P = .01 (*)
.001>P
.10>P>.05 *
.001>P
.5>P>.3 *
R = ,001
,01>P>.001 •(*)
,05>P>.02 (*)
   f    Combined data from original  ana duplicate j-mm 11
   *    Conform to Poisson.
    (*)  Borderline conformation to Poisson.
        Absence of * signifies poor agreement to Pofsson.

-------
     Presented in Table 15 are the results of all  21  goodness-of-fit tests.
The EM field size is specified and the  following quantities  from the computer
analysis of the data are given:   the number of  fields  (F) , the number of fibers,
the mean number of  fibers per field  (X),  the degrees  of  freedom for assessing
the goodness of fit of the Poisson distribution, and  the total Chi-square value.
The range within which the probability, P, lies is given in  the last column,
determined as a function of Chi-square  and the  degrees of freedom from a stan-
dard table IV in reference 55.
     A number of tests revealed  good agreement  between the observed numbers of
fibers per field and the numbers computed from  the Poisson model of random vari-
ation, while other  tests revealed poor  agreement.   The samples in which the fit
was particularly good are 5, 11,  15, 16,  19, '24, and  26.  In these seven in-
stances, the probability of a worse fit due purely to accidents of sampling was
less than 1 in 1,000.  In the remaining five instances (samples 2, 4 and 34
combined, 21 and 121 combined, 41, and  44), the probability values are greater
than 1 in 1,000 but less than 1  in 20.
     For the purpose of analyzing the EM  procedural factors in relation to com-
pliance and non-compliance with  the Poisson distribution, the samples in Table 15
were assigned to two categories:  those with P _< 0.001 and those with
P > 0.001.
     The cases conforming definitely to Poisson distribution are denoted by
asterisks and those borderline cases are  shown  by  bracketted asterisks in
Table 15.
Tendency Towards Poisson Distribution as  a Criterion  for Optimizing Variable
Levels
     It is interesting to understand why  12 cases  tend to follow Poisson distri-
butions whereas the remaining nine cases  do not.   The frequency of variable-
levels among the cases in each class can  be examined.  The variable-levels were
studied for each variable and the frequency distribution of  these levels is
summaried in Table 16.
     For example, consider the variable X, , the filter-type.  Of the 12 cases  con-
forming to Poisson distribution,  six had  Nuclepore filters and the other six had
Millipore filters.  Of the nine  cases not conforming  to  Poisson, two had Nucle-
pore filters and seven had Millipore filters.   For another example, consider
variable Xq, the method of filter dissolution.  Of the 12 cases conforming to
                                      49

-------
                                 Table 16

            VARIABLE LEVEL FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION IN TWO  GROUPS





xl
J.

X
z

X
J
X4
*T
x


X6
\f
X7
/

X8
o
X9
*F

X10
JLU

1 1


X12
jL£-






Variable
Composition


Loading


Sampler

Filter

Pore Size


Particle Side

2.3 mm
Location

Carbon Coat

Transfer
Method

Magnification


Grid Opening
Location

Choice of
Field






Level
1
2
3
L
M
H
Hi-Vol
Personal
NP
MP
0.2
0.4
0.8
Down
Up
Peri
MR
Ctr
Yes
No
Sox 1
Sox 2
Jaffe
5
10
20
Peri
MR
Ctr
Random
Consecutive
Full Grid
Opening
Group 1
12 Tests
Conforming
to Poisson
Distribution
5
3
4
5
[5]
2
5
[7]
[6]
6
[5]
4
3
[10]
2
4
3
5
5
[7]
3
3
[6]
4
[6]
2
5
3
4
[7]
3

2
Group 2

Nine Tests
Not
Conforming
4
2
3
4
[3]
[2]
[2]
7
[2]
7
4
[2]
3
[3]
6
3
3
3
[1]
8
4
4
[1]
2
[2]
5
3
1
5
3
6

[o]
Remarks On
Best Choice to
Achieve Maximum
Frequency in
Conforming and
Minimal Frequency
in Nonconforming




Best Choice



Best Choice




Best Choice








Best Choice

Best Choice








[]  indicates the highest frequency in Group 1 and the lowest  frequency in
   Group 2.

                                     50

-------
Poisson distribution, three were prepared by  Soxhlet method  1, three by Soxhlet
method 2, and six by Jaffe method.  Among the nine  cases  deviating from Poisson
distribution, four were prepared by Soxhlet method  1,  four by Soxhlet method 2,
and only one by Jaffe.
     If we how hypothesize that the variable  levels should be chosen which are
conducive to Poisson distribution  (i.e., maximum  frequency among the levels),
then we can make a clear-cut  choice in  some variables.  For  example, in vari-
able X,, particle side down is definitely preferable to particle side up.
Similarly, in variable X-, the filter dissolution method, the Jaffe method has
the maximum frequency and hence is conducive  to obtaining Poisson distribution
in fibers.
     However, it is difficult to make a clear-cut choice  in  some cases.  For
example, in variable X. , the  frequency  is 6 for Millipore and 6 for Nuclepore.
In order to avoid such indecisive  cases, one  may  look  into another group (those
deviating from Poisson's distribution)  and select  the variable level which is
the least conducive to deviation from Poisson distribution (i.e., select the
least frequency).  For example, in variable X,, Nuclepore filter with a low
frequency 2 is preferred to Millipore with frequency of 7*
     Thus, a choice of variable level should  be such that it corresponds to
the maximum frequency in the  group conforming to  Poisson  distribution and also
to the least frequency in the group deviating from  Poisson distribution.
     Following such a criterion, variables X_, X, ,  X&, X-, and X-Q give a
definitive choice in variable level.  In variables  X~, X,., Xg, and X-2> a com-
promise has to be made.  In the remaining cases of  variables, X^, X?, and X.^,
the choice is not governed by the variable levels.  The best choices in the
levels in the nine out of 12  variables  studied are  indicated in Table 16.
     Most of the choice can be explained rationally.   It  should be noted that
compliance with Poisson distribution is one of the  many rational criteria that
can be used in selecting variable levels.  Other  criteria, such as least vari-
ability in electron microscopy results, are applied in the next step of statis-
tical analysis.
Precision ift Fiber Counts per Field as  a Criterion  for Optimizing  Independent
Variables /
     In a manner similar to that discussed in the previous section,  one  can also
                                       51

-------
use the precision in fiber counts per field as a criterion for optimizing inde-
pendent variables.
     Table 17 lists for each sample (Column 1) the mean (Column 2), the standard
error of the mean (Column 3), and the ratio of standard error to the mean
(Column 4).  These statistical quantities are based on each field as a'unit of
analysis.  The relative standard error (i.e., R.S.E. = standard error of
mean/mean) has been chosen as a measure of the precision.  A value of 0.10 and
less has been arbitrarily chosen to indicate good precision and higher values
to indicate high variability or poor precision.  The categories of good and
poor precision are denoted in the remarks column.
     It is found that our of a total of 28 cases, 12 have been classified as
having good precision and 16 as having poor precision.  Following the same form
of analysis as was explained earlier for compliance with Poisson distribution,
the frequency distributions in the variable levels have been developed.
Selecting the variable levels with the highest frequency in the good precision
group and the least frequency in the poor precision group indicates definite
trends as noted in Table 18.
     It is interesting to compare these trends with those according to the
criterion of compliance with Poisson distribution.  A comparison between the
two criteria (see Tables 16 and 18) shows that in the majority of cases, the
choice of the best variable level is identical in two criteria.  In a few cases,
the best choice in one does not match with the best choice in the other.  For
example, in variable X», the Jaffe method appeared the best in the criterion of
compliance with Poisson distribution.  However, in the best precision criterion,
Soxhlet method 1 appeared quite comparable with the Jaffe method.
Consideration of Fiber Characteristics
     In the discussion so far, we had referred to only the frequency distribu-
tion of fibers.  Now we consider the other characteristics of the sample,
namely, the size distribution of length, width, aspect ratio, volume,  and mass
of chrysotile fibers.  These quantities are termed statistical descriptors.
Statistical Descriptors of the Observed Fibers on a Per-Sample Basis
     Included in the Phase 1 data base is a unit record  for each  of  the almost
8,000 fibers observed under the electron microscope.  A  table was prepared by
computer from the fiber records of each sample separately containing summary
                                      52

-------
                                Table 17

    PRECISION  IN FIBER  COUNT PER FIELD AS A CRITERION FOR OPTIMIZING
Std. Error
Sample
1
2
3
4 + 34
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 + 120
21 + 121
22
23
24
25
26
27
36
41
44
Mean
0.72
17.50
0.7773
4.9765
7.7308
44.50
(Not Enough
59.25
3.0694
0.2174
1.8796
26.25
(Not Enough
0.6950
10.9474
12.8235
109.0
28.5714
13.0667
0.1145
0.1452
0.1700
56.75
1.0691
0.8325
1.4643
35.5714
0.2977
2.8667
9.8095
of Mean
0.0787
4.8218
0.0699
0.3036
0.4659
18.3416
Data)**
16.25
0.5029
0.0335
0.1353
4.7650
Data)**
0.2184
1.6463
0.9044
9.0
2.0914
0.9282
0.0176
0.0221
0.0572
11.2129
0.0896
0.1676
0.1108
6.6471
0.0580
0.2556
1.1436
Std. Error/Mean
0.10
0.27
0.08
0.06
0.06.
0.41

0.27
0.16
0.15
0.07
0.18

0.31
0.15
0.07
0.08
0.07
0.07
0.15
0.15
0.33
0.19
0.08
0.20
0.07
0.18
0.19
0.08
0.11
Remarks
R.S.E.*10.1
good

good
good
good





good




good
good
good
good




good

good


good


R.S.E.>0.1

poor



poor

poor
poor
poor

poor

poor
poor




poor
poor
poor
poor

poor

poor
poor

poor
*  R.S.E. stands for relative standard error.

** Only one full grid opening was examined and was considered as a unit of
   analysis.   Therefore, the data are inadequate for estimating the precision
   from one field to the next.
                                     53

-------
                      Table 18




VARIABLE LEVEL FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION IN TWO GROUPS



xl
1

x2
fm

X.
3
x4

x_


X6
\^
X7
/

X8

X9


X10
i \*

xn


X12




Variable
Composition


Loading


Sampler

Filter

Pore Size


Particle Side

3 mm Location


Carbon Coat

Transfer Method


Magnification


Grid Opening Loc.


Choice of Field




Level
1
2
3
L
M
H
Hi-Vol
Personal
N.P.
M.P.
0.2
0.4
0.8
Down
Up
Peri
MR
Ctr
Yes
No
Soxhlet 1
Soxhlet 2
Jaffe
5,000
10,000
20,000
Peri
MR
Ctr
Random
Consecutive
Full Grid
Group 1
12 Tests Showing
Good Precision
5
4
3
5
3
k
4
8
[8]
4
[5]
4
3
8
4
3
3
[6]
[7]
5
[5]
2
5
3'
[6]
3
3
[53
4
[6]
4
2
Group 2
16 Tests Showing
Poor Precision
6
4
6
5
7
*
5
11
[3]
13
[4]
5
7
10
6
6
5
[5]
[0]
16
[/,]
7
5
6
[4]
6
6
[5]
5
[*»]
6
6


Remarks








Better Choice

Best Choice






Best Choice
Better Choice

Best Choice

(close 2nd best)

Best Choice


Best Choice

Best Choice


                          54

-------
statistics.  A typical printout for sample 1 is shown in Table A-4 of Appendix A.
The total number of fibers that did not extend beyond the EM field were noted.
Values of the following variables were first found on a per-fiber basis within
each sample:
     V^  - Fiber width in micrometers (considered as diameter)
     V2  - Fiber length in micrometers (that portion of the fiber within the EM
           field in the case of a fiber that crossed the boundary of the field)
     V»  - Aspect ratio, V  = V /V
      •J                   -3    »L  JL.
                                                        2
     V,  - Fiber volume in cubic micrometers, (ir/4) (V1)  (V?)
     V-, - Natural logarithm of V
     V_- - Natural logarithm of V^
      £* -L                         ib
     V-, - Natural logarithm of V,
     V,  - Natural logarithm of V,
The following statistical descriptors for the designated variables were then
computed from the individual fiber values:  the total, the mean, the standard
deviation, the standard error of the mean, the variance, the minimum value, and
the maximum value.  The variables for which these quantities are given are:
     V,  - Over all fibers
     Vn - Over all fibers
     V?1 - Over fibers lying wholly within their fields
     V_, - Over fibers lying wholly within their fields
     V,- - Over fibers lying wholly within their fields
     The total fiber volume of the sample is required for estimating the mass
concentration of fibers in the atmosphere.  A log-normal model of random vari-
ation among fibers is considered appropriate for width  (or diameter), length,
aspect ratio, and volume [56].
Statistical Analysis of Phase 1 Fractional Factorial Experiment
     For evaluating the effects of independent variables on the  statistical
descriptors (or dependent variables), we used a regression analysis  technique
[59,60].
                                       55

-------
Dependent Variables—
     Certain of the sample descriptors (or measured response) were analyzed in
relation to the 12 controlled factors (or independent variables) of the Phase 1
experiment design by constructing performance equations with the descriptors as
the dependent variables.  The dependent variables chosen are listed in Table 19.
These  are the dependent variables, or observed responses, of the experiment.
A square root transformation is appropriate in response to Yg because it in-
volves number count [56].  In all other responses, designated Y  through Y  ,
natural logarithmic transformations are appropriate [57].
Regression Analysis—
     Regression equations were constructed to express each dependent variable
in terms of the coded  independent variables.  The best values of the coefficients
were determined by statistical regression methods using the stepwise regression
program BMD02R from the BMD library of statistical programs [59].
     The signs of the  coefficients of independent variables in regression equa-
tions  are listed in Table 20.  A positive sign in this table means that the de-
pendent variable increases in value as one increases the coded value of the
independent variable.  A negative sign represents a decreasing trend and an
absence of any sign means that the dependent variable is not significantly
affected.  This is easy to visualize for the linear components.  For the quad-
ratic  components and for a combination of linear and quadratic components, the
effects associated with the different levels of the experimental factors can
be clearly displayed in the form of plots.  If the magnitude of  the effect was
not statistically significant, it was dropped from further consideration.  A
complete treatment of  the method is illustrated in Appendix B.
     The results of the analyses for Y  and Y   are given in detail in Tables B-l
through B-4 and summarized in Figures 3 through 6 for a quick comparison.  Fiber
count  concentration Y_ and fiber mass concentration estimates Y  _  are  the most
commonly considered responses for quantitative EM work.  Other responses, YI
through Yg, are of secondary importance and such detailed analyses of  these
are not presented.
Discussion of Main Effects
     In this section, we discuss separately  the  effect of each variable on the
two dependent variables, namely, the fiber count estimate (Y_) and the mass coi
centration estimate (Y .).  Rational explanations are offered where possible.
                                      56

-------
                             Table 19
                   DEPENDENT VARIABLES, PHASE 1
Variable            Definition*
  YI                Mean Ln  (fiber width, micrometers)
  Y2                Standard error of Y!
  Y3                Mean Ln  (fiber length, micrometers)
  Y4                Standard error of Y3
  Y5                Mean Ln  (aspect ratio)
  Y6                Standard error of Y5
  Y7                Mean Ln  (fiber volume, micrometers3)
  Y8                Standard error of Y7
  Y9                Square root (estimated number of fibers per
                    cm3 of atmosphere)
  Y10               Ln  (estimated mass concentration of fibers
                    in the atmosphere, micrograms per cubic meter)
 * The unit of observation for these variables is a combination as
   specified in the experiment design.  All logarithms are to base e.
                                 57

-------
                                   Table 20

   SIGNS OF COEFFICIENTS OF INDEPENDENT VARIABLES IN PERFORMANCE EQUATIONS,
                                   PHASE 1



                                Dependent Variables^ '
   Independent
   Variable Code*               Y,    Y2    Y3   Y,,    Y5    Y6    Y7    Y8    Y9   YH
  1.  X:L  Composition                     +         +                   +
  2.  XjQ  Composition           -    -         -        -        -    +
  3.  X2L  Concentration         ____        ____
  4.  X2Q  Concentration                                                 +
  5.  X3Q  Sampler type                    +         +             +    +
  6.  X^Q  Filter type           +              _        _
  7.  X5L  Pore size
  8.  X5Q  Pore size
  9.  X6Q  Filter side                                                   +
10.  X7L  Location on filter         —    —         —   —        —
11.  X7Q  Location on filter
12.  X8Q  Carbon coating             +    _    +    _   +    _   +    _
13.  X9L  Transfer method       +'         +         +         +         -
14.  X9Q  Transfer method       —         +         +   +              —
15.  X10L Magnification         -              +                  +    +
16.  X10Q Magnification                   —         —                   +
17.  XnL Grid opening loc.
18.  XnQ Grid opening loc.                                   +         +
19.  X12L Choice of fields
20.  X12Q Choice of fields      -    +         +        +    -    +    +
^ ' For explanation of dependent variables,  please see Table 19.

*   Independent variables designated Xx-Xi2  are the same as described in Table 4.
    Each of these have linear (L) and quadratic (Q) components.   A complete
    description of these is given in Appendix A.
                                       58

-------
Ul
o
0
o
o
CU
f>
•rl
Pn /-s
U-i 'H
O  ^5
M
C
0

4_t
a)

^








6.0
5.0

4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
-1.0
-2.0
-3.0

-4.0
-5.0
ft 0


.

: , 1 '


: l 1 III
-

-
r
it ii i

cu cu co
rH rH CO
•H -H Ct)
CU -M CU -P 0) rH
rH O -U O -U t)D
•H CO -iH CO -H. M '•j
4J >-, CO >> CO CU 2
OMOMO^i H^ »C
COJ36J3S-H 4J 3 >i O O
>-, O •< U •< En J3 -r) > > CO
ij tsJD "T? ^3 I W
.flOOOOO >rl <" ^ *H "
CJ^O-t |Z
X6: Filter Xg: Carbot
Side Coating
(d) (e)
                         Figure 3.   Graphical presentation of performance equation 9 in Phase 1,
                                    Net contribution to square root of fiber concentration (no.
                                    of all fibers/cm3 of air).

-------
ON
O
       o
       c
       o
       CJ
       •U M—I
       o o
       0) O

       CO w

       cr ^
M
4-1

O
       CU
      a
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
0.0
-1.0
-2.0
-3.0
-4.0
-5.0
f. o
T
i

1


,__(

4-1
(U
,_ |
*£3
X
0
co
x9


]
!

1 1


CV|

4-1
CU
r-4 O>
fj im
X "4-1
O «

: Transfer
Method


I
I

1 1




x
X 0
0 0
0 0
o
« o


I
-

1




b^
o
o
o

o
CM
X^Q: Magnification

I


1


»^"»
M
0)
,e
a.
•H

(U
PM
Xll =


1

1

(0
3
•H
TJ
CO

1
T3
•H
£
Grid

I


i





)-<
0)
4-1
fi
(U
u
Opening
Location

1 I


1 1
CU

•H
4-1
j3
C O
O 01
*d to
pj d
cd o
prf O
X]^: Choice
Fields


1

1
T3
•H
M
O

(U
M
•H
4_)
c
w
of

                             (a)
                                               (b)
(c)
                                      Figure 4^  Graphical presentation of performance equation 9
                                                 in Phase 1.   Net contribution  to square root of
                                                 'fiber  concentration (no. of all  fibers/cm^ of air).

-------
CO
co
>-•


4-1
(-1 O
4J -H
C -U
O C(J
CJ S-i
0) 0)

*£
  O
  o
 1.2

 1.0

 0.8

 0.6


 0.4

 0.2

 0.0

-0.2


-0.4

-0.6




-1.0


-1.2
                 ^j
                 O
                       •H
                       4-1
                       O
                       co
                oo
                vo-st-
                     4-1  01
                     O  4J
                     CO  -H
     CO
     CO
     Cfl
     H
     00
     t-l
ooo
r-cN^
                X,: Composition

                   of Sample

                      -(a)
                                                 'O
                                                 cy
cu
Bd
                                      Concentration
                                      on Filter

                                         (b)
                                                                        o
                                                                        (X
                                                                        01
s
Z
                       0)
                       (-1
                       o
                       o.
                      •H
-H
S
                                          X :  Filter

                                             Type

                                               (c)
                                                                                                        0
                                                                                                        oo
                                    X_:  Pore Size


                                         (d)
                            Figure 5.  Graphical presentation of performance equation 10
                                       in Phase 1.  Net contribution to natural log of mass
                                       concentration of all  fibers, yg/m3  of air.

-------
ON
to
TO • j-.i— — - 	 _ 	 _ 	 , 	 , 	
03 4-1
«S o 1.0 -
co " •*•*• T
^4j[ 0.8-
OD
an. 0.6- L
o2 0.4- T
i— i < £ 0.2 T
O PM
•"-• ' 0 0
iH
C iH
° , 3 -
OJ ^0 4J 4J
^ « n ^ * », H
Q, LJ 
Xy: 3 mm Portion Xfl: Carbon X : Transfer XIQ: 1
Location Coating Method
(a) (b) (c)
••' 1 l l

it f r •
cu "C
•S i
° 8' a 3 a
§O O  C 0 *J
o o cd o C
^ CM p3 o .. w
Magnification X „: Choice of
Fields
(d) (e)


i
i
-
.
                   Figure 6.   Graphical presentation of performance equation 10 in Phase 1.   Net
                              contribution to natural log of mass concentration of all fibers,
                                    of air.

-------
     X.^ Composition of Sample;  This variable affects the total fiber count
estimate.  The composition level 2  (viz, 60% chrysotile plus 40% amosite) gives
a higher value than either the composition 1 or the composition 3.  The vari-
able X.^ also affects the mass concentration estimates, the composition 2 shows
higher value than compositions 3 and 1.  The probable reason for this is that
the amosite fibers are generally blocky, whereas we assume a cylindrical geome-
try for computing the volume.  This assumption of cylindrical shape tends to
over-estimate the volume of amosite fibers.
     Xp Concentration on Filter:  Light concentration gives the highest relative
value for fiber count estimates and the heavy concentration gives the lowest
relative value.  Exactly the same trend is apparent for the mass concentration
estimates.  The most probable explanation of this is the possibility of aggre-
gation of fibers in heavy concentration samples, leading to a failure to count
all fibers.
     X0 Sampler Type;  Personal sampler appears to give a higher value of fiber
      j
counts than the high-volume sampler.  This variable has no significant effect
on mass concentration estimates.  One plausible explanation may be that the
face velocity of particles in a personal sampler is l/5th that in the high-
volume sampler.
     X, Filter Type;  Millipore filters appear to give slightly higher mass
concentration estimates than the Nuclepore; however, the filter type does not
significantly affect the fiber count estimate.
     Xg. Pore Size;  Pore size between 0.2 and 0.8 ym does not significantly
     	M~3   rr	~*H****amm
affect the fiber count estimate; on the other hand, the 0.4 ym filters
appear to yield the highest mass concentration estimates.
     Xfi Filter Side on Grid;  Keeping the particle side up results in signifi-
cantly lower fiber count estimate, but does not affect the mass concentration
estimate.  A probable explanation is that only the very small and fine fibers
tend to be washed away and their mass is not appreciable.  Keeping particle
side down is the best method to avoid this type of fiber loss.
     X? 2.3 mm Portion Location;  This variable has no significant effect,
either on the fiber count estimate or the mass concentration  estimate.
                                      63

-------
     X0 Carbon Coating:  Carbon coating of the filter very definitely gives a
      o   *
higher value of fiber count estimate and also a higher value of the mass con-
centration estimate.  These data give credence to the theory that the carbon
coating locks the fibers in place and prevents their washing away.
     XQ Filter Transfer Method:  The Jaffe method of filter dissolution gives
the highest value of the fiber count estimate and also the highest value of the
mass concentration estimate.  Thus, these data bear out the contention of  the
advocates of the Jaffe method that the method is very gentle and slow and, hence,
does not  wash away any fibers.  The Soxhlet method 2 gives the lowest value of
fiber count estimate, presumably because of fiber loss due to extended duration
of washings.
     X-Q  Magnification;  20,OOOX magnification gives the highest value of  the
fiber count estimate, but the effect is very slight on the mass concentration
estimate.  The explanation is that with higher magnification, more fine and
short fibers are visible; however, their volume contribution is quite small.
     X,   Grid Opening Location;  A mid-radius location gives low values of fiber
count estimate, but does not significantly affect the mass concentration estimate.
Presumably, small fibers may migrate from the center of the filter towards the
periphery — if it is not carbon coated, the effect being most noticeable  at
the mid-radius.
     X. 2  Choice of Fields;  Random and consecutively selected fields give  similar
values of the fiber count estimate and significantly higher values of the  esti-
mate than those for the entire grid opening.  The same trend also holds for the
mass concentration estimate.  One possible explanation is that the operator may
be unknowingly skipping empty fields (with no fibers), thus introducing a  bias.
Another possible explanation is that a full grid opening examined required a
long time for fiber counting and often caused operator fatigue, which could
have resulted in lower fiber count.
Optimum Choice of Variable Levels
     It is a reasonable assumption that variable levels which give the highest
values of the fiber count estimates (Y_) and/or the mass concentration  esti-
mates (YIQ)  are the optimum levels.  (There is no reason to suspect  external
contamination,  which could increase the fiber count or the mass  concentration
estimates.  If fiber migration occurred, there will be some areas with  higher
true concentration but other areas will be lower in concentration.)  Thus, high

                                      64

-------
values are associated with efficiency of fiber retention, fiber recognition,
counting, and sizing, and low values are associated with fiber loss, inefficient
technique, etc.
     Based on these assumptions, the best choices of variable levels for maxi-
mizing (Yg and YIQ) are summarized in Table 21.  These choices are also com-
pared with those based on the earlier chosen criteria of compliance with Poisson
distribution and with the internal precision of fiber counts per field.
     Though the optimum choice is somewhat dependent on the criterion chosen,
many very remarkable trends emerge.
     The variables X , X,, and X^ (air sampling variables) do not affect re-
sponses Y_ and Y. _.  However, considerations of Poisson distribution and better
precision allow choice to be NP over MP as indicated in Table 21.  Variable X., ,
is not generally within one's control.  Variable X- (concentration on filter)
should be kept low (in practical ambient air monitoring applications this
would not be a problem).
     Among the variables of TEM grid preparation, variable X7 (2.3 mm portion
location) appears immaterial.  Still, it is recommended to cut 2.3 mm portions
from widely separated locations for duplicate of triplicate grids.  Variable XQ
                                                                              o
offers a clear-cut choice.  Carbon-coating of filters is recommended for pre-
serving the particulate integrity and distribution.  Variable X, again offers a
clear-cut choice.  For transferring particles to carbon substrate, the particle
side of the filter should be kept facing down, i.e., in contact with the carbon
substrate.  In variable Xq, the filter transfer method, the Soxhlet method 2
should be eliminated.  Indications suggest the superiority of the Jaffe method
and this is reinforced by the fact that it is less susceptible to operator
technique.
     Among the variables of TEM examination, variable X^, the grid opening
location of preference, is in the center or the peripheral regions.  The vari-
able X]Q, the magnification, appears to give a clear choice of 10,OOOX.  However,
if we assume that the criterion of maximizing the fiber counts is more important
than the mass concentration and the other criteria, then the choice is 20,OOOX.
From a practical standpoint, higher resolution and higher magnifications are
important for detecting the very fine fibers [46] which may have a greater
chance of remaining airborne.  Therefore, we recommend a magnification of
20,OOOX be used for fiber counting, sizing, and studying morphology.  For cases
                                      65

-------
                                                  Table  21

    OPTIMIZATION  OF VARIABLE LEVELS  ACCORDING  TO  FOUR DIFFERENT  CRITERIA


Variable
Xi Composition


Xj Loading



Level
1
2
3
L
M
H
Sq. Root of
Est. No. of
Fibers/cm^

Highest

Highest

Ln Poisson- Precision
Est. Mass Distr. in Fiber
Cone. yg/n>3 Compliance count/field Remarks

Highest

Highest A low loading level is
Best certainly preferable.
However, this requires
Xj  Sampler


XA  Filter Type


Xj  Pore Size



X6  Particle Side
    Filter Transfer
    Magnification
                   Hi-Vol
                   Personal

                   NJ>.
                   M.P.

                   0.2
                   0.4
                   0.8

                   Down
                   Up
Higher
[Higher]
X.  3 mm Portion Loc.   Peri
 '                     MR
                       Ctr
Xo  Carbon Coating      Yes
                       No
                       Soxhlet  1
                       Soxhlet  2
                       Jaffe
                   5,000
                   10,000
                   20,000
X..  Grid Opening Loc.   Peri
                       MR
                       Ctr
                                    Low
Choice of  Fields    Random        [High]
                   Consecutive    High
                   Full  Grid      Low
                                          covering  several grid
                                          openings  for counting
                                          enough number of
                                          fields.

                                          Variable  X3  is prob-
                                          ably Insignificant.

               Better       Better         Nuclepore appears a
Higher                                    better choice.

                            Best           Pore size smaller or
 Highest                                  equal  to  0.4  urn is
                                          preferable.

[Higher]        [Better]                    Keeping particle side
                                          down is definitely
                                          better and must be
                                          adopted for  transfer-
                                          ring fibers  to carbon
                                          substrates.

 Highest                                  Variable  "7  is prob-
                                          ably insignificant.
                            Best           Duplicate grids should
                                          be prepared  from dif-
                                          ferent locations.

[Higher]                     [Better]       Carbon coating of fil-
                                          ter Is certainly better
                                          and should  form a
                                          necessary step  in sam-
                                          ple processing.

                            Best           More work needed for
                                          dec i d i ng  between
                             (2nd  Best)    Soxhlet 1 and Jaffe.
                                          Soxhlet 2 should be
                                          eliminated.

                                          5.000X is too  low to
                            Best           give reliable  EM esti-
                                          mates. While 10.000X
                                          appears best overall,
                                          20.000X is preferred
                                          when fiber count  con-
                                          centration and detec-
                                          tion of small  fibers
                                          is  more important
                                          than mass concentration
                                          estimate.

                                          Variable xu is prob-
                            Best           ably  insignificant.
                                          Grid openings  should be
                                          chosen from all  loca-
                                          tions with equal
                                          frequency.

                            [Best]        Though random choice
                                          of  small fields is
                                          best,  in practice,  it
                                          is  easier to use full
                                          grid opening,  which
                                          eliminates -the fibers
                                          crossing the field of
                                          view.
                                 [Higher]
                                 (2nd Highest)

                                 [Highest]       [Highest]       [Best]
                                                   Highest         Best
                                    Highest         (2nd Highest)
                                                    [High]
                                                    High
                                                    Low
[  ]  Best Choice, ( )  2nd Best  Choice
                                                         66

-------
where majority of fibers are of amphibole asbestos, a lower magnification
(e.g., 10,OOOX) may be sufficient.
     Variable Xj~» the choice of  fields, appears to give the random choice of
Small fields as the best in all respects.  However, in practice, this can
cause problems in counting fibers longer than the field of view and also fibers
extending beyond the perimeter of the field of view.  Also, the operator un-
knowingly may tend to skip empty  fields, thereby introducing a bias.  These
difficulties can be avoided by using full grid opening as one field.  If the
fiber concentration is low enough, there will be no operator fatigue.
MASS CONCENTRATION ESTIMATES
     In addition to fiber number  concentration, the mass concentration of
asbestos in air may be an important parameter.  Table 22 lists the details of
the air sampling parameters, namely, the effective filter area (Column 2), the
                                                                           2
volume of air filtered in leters  (Column 3), the air volume filtered per cm
of the filter (Column 4).  It also lists the total area examined in the EM
(Column 5)s the observed fiber counts (Column 6), the estimate of fibers per
ml of air (Column 7), the total volume over all fibers observed (Column 8),
fiber density (weighted average)  (Column 9), and estimated mass concentration
    3
yg/m  in air (Column 10).
Comparison of Observed Mass Concentrations with Those Expected
     When we compare the estimated mass concentration values from Table 22
with those from Table 11 as expected from the aerosol generation parameters,
we find there is a substantial difference.  The EM estimates are smaller by
a factor of 100-300 in samples 1  to 18 and by a factor of 300-1,000 in samples
19 to 27.
     Sample 11 gives a substantially larger value than all the rest.  This is
explained by the fact that a few very large fibers were detected in this
                                                                               3
sample, as listed below.  The 203 fibers counted had a total volume of 11.19 urn  .
                                                      3
The three large fibers listed below account for 7.5 ym  of the volume  (see p.  69)
     The detection of these large fibers indicates that the large fraction of
the total mass is accounted for by a few large fibers in the aerosol chamber.
It is likely that these large fibers have settled by gravity rather than being
drawn onto the filter by the air  sampler's suction.  Another possible  explana-
tion is that the air circulating  fan might have acted as an impactor and  removed
                                      67

-------
oo
                                                         Table 22

                    ESTIMATES OF NUMBER AND MASS CONCENTRATION OF ALL FIBERS PER UNIT  VOLUME OF AIR, PHASE 1


Samples
1
2
3
4 & 34
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 & 120
21 & 121
22
23
24
25
26
27
Filter
Area,
cm2
6.7
6.7
6.7
406.5
406.5
406.5
6.7
6.7
6.7
406.5
406.5
406.5
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
6.7
406.5
406.5
406.5
Air Vol.
Filtered,
liters
32
32
32
9116
9200
8400
512
512
512
2080
2030
2040
124
124
124
513
513
513
7.6
7.6
7.6
29.2
29.2
29.2
7920
7701
9167
Air Vol.
per Unit
Area, I/cm2
4.78
4.78
4.78
22.43
22.63
20.66
76.42
76.42
76.42
5.12
4.99
5.02
18.51
18.51
18.51
76.57
76.57
76.57
1.13
1.13
1.13
4.36
4.36
4.36
19.48
18.94
22.55
Area
Scanned,
10"6cm2
200
864
53
85
104
288
72
16
18
69
108
576
72
200
76
4.25
144
28
1080
125
421
800
288
186
816
35
504
Obs.
Fiber
Count
144
210
164
423
201
178
269
237
221
60"
203
210
695
140
208
218
218
200
196
57
61
34
227
200
169
205
249
Est. Fibers
per cm3
of Air
151
51
647
222
85
30
49
194
161
170
377
73
521
38
148
670
19.8
93
161
404
128
9.7
181
247
10.6
309
21.9
Obs . Fi ber
Volume,
ym3
0.383
1.726
0.470
1.302
0.422
0.507
2.472
1.386
0.436
0.167
11.194
1.057
2.285
3.844
1.121
0.348
0.751
0.678
1.778
0.093
0.241
0.362
0.492
0.674
0.811
0.587
8.383
Fiber
Density,*
Af
g/cm
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.43
2.58
2.58
2.58
2.58
2.58
2.58
2.58
2.58
2.58
2.54
2.54
2.54
2.54
2.54
2.54
> 2.54
2.54
2.54
Est. Mass Con-
centration, All
Fibers, yg/m3
0.974
1.016
4.508
1.660
0.436
0.207
1.092
2.754
0.770
1.220
53.590
0.943
4.424
2.679
2.056
2.759
0.176
0.816
3.700
1.672
1.287
0.264
0.995
2.111
0.130
2.249
1.874
     * Fiber density refers to the average density for all mineral fibers considering their weight proportions, in the
       mixture used.

-------
                      UNUSUALLY LARGE FIBERS DETECTED
                                IN SAMPLE 11
Fiber No.
5
99
110
L
ym
9.4*
5.6*
1.25*
W
ym
0.9
0.56
0.5
Volume
(ym)3
6.1
1.12
0.25
                  * All of these fibers extended beyond
                    the field perimeter; hence, these
                    lengths represent only underestimates
                    of the true length.

a substantial amount of asbestos from the air in the aerosol chamber.   Sample
Number 11 was collected on a high-volume sampler with a large surface area
(406.5 cm2).  It is only by chance that their presence within the areas
randomly selected on the grid was noted.  This example points out the large
bias introduced by a few large fibers in the estimate of the total volume and,
hence, in the total mass concentration.
                                       69

-------
                                  SECTION 8
               RESULTS AND DISCUSSION OF PHASES 2,  3, 4 AND  5

 PHASE 2  RESULTS
      In  the Phase  2  analysis, two types of fiber classification were  used.  The
 "standard  classification" method allowed six categories, viz, chrysotile, amosite,
 crocidolite, wollastonite, ambiguous, and other.  In the "alternative classifi-
 cation"  method,  only four categories were allowed,  viz, chrysotile, amosite,
 crocidolite, and wollastonite.  This is, in the alternative  classification
 method,  the ambiguous and other fibers were assigned to one  of the  four  cate-
 gories based on  the  best operator judgment.  For example, if a sample was studied
 using morphology,  diffraction, and X-ray, the standard classification was based
 on all three tests simultaneously.  Any fiber not giving a characteristic dif-
 fraction pattern or  X-ray analysis was classified as ambiguous.   In the  alter-
 native classification method, such fibers were assigned to the four mineral
 categories based on  other available information.  For example, a  fiber that did
 not give a recognizable diffraction pattern, but gave a recognizable  X-ray
 analysis,  was  classified based on X-ray analysis and/or morphology.   Similarly,
 a  fiber  that did not give a distinct X-ray analysis was classified  based on
 electron diffraction and/or morphology.  The category "other" includes fibers
 for which  X-ray  and/or diffraction measurements could not be made.
      In  the standard classification method, ambiguous and other  categories
 constitute a variable percentage of the fibers.  Since the ambiguous  and other
 categories cannot  be assigned any fixed density, their mass  concentration  is
 subject  to error.  The difficulty is avoided, although not eliminated, in  the
 alternative classification method, where there are  no ambiguous  and other
 categories.  The ambiguous and other fibers combined will be designated
 "exceptional".
Phase 2 Data
     Specified properties of the population of individual  fibers in each of
the nine Phase 2 samples were determined by application of IITRI computer

                                      70

-------
program SIZ1.  The results of the data reduction are presented in Tables 23
through 26.
     The fiber counts are given in Table 23 for the six fiber categories
allowed under the standard classification method and the four categories al-
lowed under the alternative classification method.  Additional items of infor-
mation per sample are:  the total fiber count, the area scanned (in units of
  -4   2
10   cm ), and the number of grid openings.  The area per grid opening was
         -4   2
0.72 x 10   cm .  The area examined in the case of each of the last two
samples was a portion of a grid opening.  Column 14 lists the total time on
TEM for studying each sample.
                                                       ft   ")
     The estimated number concentration (in units of 10 /cm  of filter) and
                               —9      2
mass concentration (units of 10   gm/cm  of filter) are given in Table 24 for
fibers classified as chrysotile under the standard and alternative classifi-
cation methods.  The 95% confidence limits for the number concentrations were
calculated by the computer program POISSON 2 under the assumption of a Poisson
distribution of the fibers.  The listing for POISSON 2 is given in Appendix C.
     This table also lists the total TEM time for inspecting 100 fibers in
each, sample, which is a measure of the experimental effort required.  It is
quite evident that the experimental effort required is substantially dependent
on the method of analysis.  For example, the method based on morphology and
electron diffraction requires the least time and, hence, should be considered
preferable among the three methods.
     The size distributions of the individual chrysotile fibers within each
sample as classified by the two methods, are characterized in Table 25.  The
properties treated are:  fiber length (micrometers), fiber diameter or width
                                          -12
(micrometers), and fiber mass (units of 10    gin).  For each quantity, the
geometric mean and the mean and standard deviation of the natural logarithms
(to the base e) are given.
     The estimated number concentration of all fibers combined, and of fibers
classified as ambiguous and other under the standard classification method, are
listed by sample in Table 26.  Also listed are the percentages of the total
fibers classified as ambiguous, other, and exceptional  (ambiguous and other
combined).
                                      71

-------
                                                        Table  23


                               NUMBERS OF FIBERS OBSERVED AND  CLASSIFIED, PHASE 2 SAMPLES
Sample
escription
Code*

2113
2121
2132
2211
2222
2233
2312
2323
2331
Combined
Area
Spflnn^r!
10~4 cm2

1.44(2)t
0.72(1)
2.16(3)
0.72(1)
1.44(2)
0.72(1)
0.72(1)
0.34(1)
0.14(1)
8.40(13)
No.
"F^HiayQ
Total

149
114
228
137
287
227
398
188
176
1904
Standard Classification Method

Chrys-
otile
93
64
209
117
221
130
204
56
39
1133
Amo-
site
0
1
0
10
11
4
0
0
0
26
Crocid-
olite
0
0
0
0
0
0
43
38
61
142
Wollas-
tonite
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
3
36
139

Ambig-
uous
50
49
1
10
22
93
45
57
11
338
fit-KoT-

6
0
18
0
33
0
6
34
29
126
Alternative
Classification Method

Chrys-
otile
149
113
228
125
276
223
219
85
58
1476
Amo-
site
0
1
0
12
11
4
0
0
0
28
Crocid-
olite
0
0
0
0
0
0
56
94
72
222
Wollas-
tonite
0
0
0
0
0
0
123
9
46
178
Total
Time
on
TEM
Hrs.
9.0
6.0
4.0
,7.0
3.5
12.0
7.0
10.5
8.0

-•J
N3
     * For explanation  of the sample description code,  see Tables  7  and 12.


     t Number in parentheses is number of grid openings.

-------
                                   Table 24

             CONCENTRATIONS OF CHRYSOTILE FIBERS, PHASE 2 SAMPLES
Sample
)escription
Code*

2113
2121
2132
2211
2222
2233
2312
2323
2331

2113
2121
2132
2211
2222
2233
2312
2323
2331
Identification
Method Usedt
STJ
M+D+X
M-KiT
M+D
M+X
M+D
M+D+X
M+D
M+D+X
M+X
ALT!



Number Concentration
Estimate, 106/cm2
of Filter**
iNDARD CLASSIFICATION
0.646 (0.521, 0.791)
0.889 (0.684, 1.135)
0.968 (0.841, 1.108)
1.625 (1.344, 1.948)
1.535 (1.339, 1.751)
1.806 (1,508, 2.144)
2.833 (2.458, 3.250)
1.647 (1.244, 2.139)
2.786 (1.981, 3.808)
SRNATIVE CLASSIFICATK
1.035 (0.875, 1.215)
1.569 (1.293, 1.887.)
1.056 (0.923, 1.202)
1.736 (1.445, 2.069)
1.917 (1.697, 2.157)
3.097 (2.704, 3.532)
3.042 (2.652, 3.472)
2.500 (1.997, 3.091)
4.143 (3.145, 5.356)
Mass Concentration
Estimate, 10~9 gm/cm2
of Filters
METHOD
4.781
7.138
9.818
14.731
15.528
10.742
26.008
25.190
35.007
)N METHOD
6.126
10.527
9.959
14.787
16.857
20.586
29.385
37.133
48.340
TEM Time for
Studying 100
Fibers, Hrs.

6.04
5.26
1.75
5.10
1.22
5.29
1.76
5.59
4.54




*  For explanation of the sample description code, see Tables 7 and 12.

** Numbers in parentheses are 95% confidence limits based on the Poisson
   distribution.

t  M+D refers to  morphology + electron diffraction,
   M+X refers to  morphology + X-ray analysis, and                ,
   M+D+X refers to morphology + electron diffraction + X-ray analysis;
                                       73

-------
                                                   Table  25

                           SIZE DISTRIBUTIONS OF CHRYSOTILE  FIBERS, PHASE 2 SAMPLES
Sample
Descriptioi
Code*
Fiber Length,
n Geom.
Mean
Mean
Ln
ym
St. Dev.
Ln
Fiber Width, ym
Geom.
Mean
Mean St. Dev.
Ln Ln
Fiber Mass, 10~12 g
Geom.
Mean
Mean
Ln
St. Dev.
Ln
STANDARD CLASSIFICATION METHOD
2113
2121
2132
2211
2222
2233
2312
2323
2331
0.7931
0.8238
0.8162
0.7287
0.7565
0.7413
0.8747
0.9651
1.0466
-0.2318
-0.1938
-0.2032
-0.3165
-0.2791
-0.2993
-0.1339
-0.0355
0.0456
0.7899
0.6754
0.8270
0.8657
0.7700
0.7387
0.6119
0.5990
0.6468
0.0467
0.0521
0.0531
0.0522
0.0515
0.0483
0.0584
0.0687
0.0644
-3.0634
-2.9549
-2.9349
-2.9532
-2.9670
-3.0297
-2.8409
-2.6786
-2.7423
ALTERNATIVE CLASSIFICATION
2113
2121
2132
2211
2222
2233
2312
2323
2331
0.6780
0.6996
0.7587
0.6737
0.7028
0.7254
0.8467
0.9912
0.8214
-0.3886
-0.3573
-0.2761
-0.3590
-0.3527
-0.3210
-0.1664
-0.0088
-0.1967
0.7968
0.7142
0.8366
0.8929
0.7761
0.8281
0.6463
0.5988
0.7339
0.0438
0.0507
0.0521
0.0503
0.0499
0.0471
0.0594
0.0669
0.0654
-3.1275
-2.9821
-2.9554
-2.9896
-2.9987
-3.0553
-2.8236
-2.7044
-2.7277
0.4070
0.3888
0.3597
0.3744
0.4442
0.3209
0.3036
0.3426
0.2696
METHOD
0.4200
0.3929
0,3600
0.3962
0.4337
0.3547
0.3151
0.3611
0.3296
0.00354
0.00456
0.00471
0.00405
0.00409
0.00354
0.00609
0.00929
0.00887

0.00266
0.00367
0.00420
0.00348
0.00357
0.00329
0.00610
0.00906
0.00717
-5.6557
-5.3896
-5.3589
-5.5090
-5.4991
-5.6448
-5.1017
-4.6789
-4.7250

-5.9297
-5.6076
-5.4730
-5.6602
-5.6362
-5.7178
-5.0998
-4.7036
-4.9381
1.3246
1.1463
1.3381
1.3566
1.3878
1.1215
0.9960
1.0828
0.8529

1.3575
1.1996
1.3548
1.4462
1.3677
1.2635
1.0213
1.0705
1.0018
* First digit of the sample description  code  refers to the phase number; second, third, and fourth
  digits refer to the  levels  of  independent variables used.  For further explanation of the sample
  description code, see Tables 7 and  12.

-------
Ul
                                                      Table 26

                                     CONCENTRATIONS OF ALL FIBERS AND OF FIBERS
                               OF "AMBIGUOUS" AND "OTHER" CATEGORIES, PHASE 2 SAMPLES


Sample
Description
Code*
2113
2121
2132
2211
2222
2233
2312
2323
2331
All Fibers
Number
Concentration
Estimate,
106/cm2
of Filter
1.035
1.583
1.056
1.903
1.993
3.153
5.528
5.529
12.571
Ambiguous Fibers
Number
Concentration
Estimate,
106/cm2
of Filter
0.347
0.680
0 . 0046
0.139
0.153
1.291
0.625
1.676
0.786

Percent
of
Total
Fibers
33.56
42.98
0.44
7.30
7.66
40.97
11.31
30.32
6.25
Other Fibers
Number
Concentration
Estimate,
106/cm2
of Filter
0.0416
0.0
0.0833
0.0
0.2291
0.0
0.0833
1.000
2.071

Percent
of
Total
Fibers
4.03
0.0
7.89
0.0
11.50
0.0
1.51
18.08
16.48
All
Exceptional
Fibers


Percent
of Total
Fibers
37.59
42.98
8.33
7.30
19.16
40.97
12.81
48.40
22.73
     * First digit of the sample description code refers to the phase number; second, third, and fourth
       digits refer to the levels of  independent variables used.  For further explanation, see Tables 7
       and 12.

-------
Methods of Data Analysis

     Statistical methods applied in the analysis of the Phase 2 data are as

follows.

     Confidence limits for number concentrations were calculated by IITRI

program POISSON 2 (Appendix C) under the assumption of a random distribution

of fibers on the grid.

     Multiple regression analyses were made on each of the sets of dependent

variables defined below by means of a modified version of the stepwise regres-
sion program BMD02R from the BMD package of statistical programs [59].  The
data input for each regression analysis included the orthogonally coded values

of the independent variables given in Table 7 (X^, X.^, X9L, XgQ, X^L, X^Q)

in addition to the values of the dependent variables.         ;

Regression Equations                                          1

     The dependent variables for the regression analyses have the following

symbols and definitions.

        Symbol     Definition

         YI-       Square root of the estimated number concentration of
                   chrysotile fibers in units of millions per car of filter

         Y-„       Natural logarithm of the estimated mass concentration of
                   chrysotile fibers in units of nanograms per cm  of filter

         Y-        Natural logarithm of the geometric mean length of chrysotile
                   fibers in micrometers

         Y-        Natural logarithm of the geometric mean width of chrysotile
                   fibers in micrometers

         Y ,       Natural logarithm of the geometric mean mass of chrysotile
                   fibers in units of lO"1^ grams

         Y-_       Square root of the estimated number concentration of all
                   fibers in units of millions per cm^ of filter

         Y .       Arcsine of the square root of the proportion of all fibers
                   classified as exceptional (ambiguous or other) using the
                   standard classification method

There are nine values of each dependent variable, i.e., one value per Phase  2

sample.

     The number concentration estimates were subjected to the square  root

transformation (Y.   and Y  ).  The mass concentration estimates and  the  geometric


                                      76

-------
mean fiber lengths, widths, and masses were  subjected  to the logarithmic trans-
formation (Y,2» YO» Y  , and Y  ).  The exceptional  fiber percentages were sub-
jected to the arcsine-square-root  transormation  (Y   ).  The selected transfor-
mations are often employed in analyzing the  effects  of independent variables on
three kinds of dependent variables by means  of analysis of variance or regres-
sion analysis [56,57].
     The 12 regression equations constructed from the Phase 2 data are given
in Table 27.  In each  equation, only those candidate independent variables
appear that have effects that are  significant at the 10% probability level.
The method of equation construction is described in  Appendix B.
     Some overall properties of the equations are given in Table 28:  the number
of residual degrees of freedom, the residual standard deviation, and the degree
                   2    2
of determination, R .  R  ranges from 73 to  98% in the group of equations, sig-
nifying that the values of the dependent variables are, in general, strongly
influenced by the independent variables included in  the equations.
     The first six equations are based on data in which fibers were classified
by the standard method.  The next  five equations are based on data in which
fibers were classified by the alternative method.  The final equation refers to
the number concentration of all types of fibers combined, and hence the method
of fiber classification is not applicable.
Discussion of Phase 2  Results
     The results obtained in Phase 2 will be considered in relation to the
three factors that were systematically varied in the experiment design:  (1) the
three different filter preparations; (2) the three transfer methods; and (3) the
three techniques of fiber identification, with the further contrast between the
standard and alternative methods of classifying fibers.
The Three Filter Compositions—
     In the Phase 2 experiment design (Table 7), it  was the intent to vary the
fiber composition in the preparation of the  three filters, with essentially pure
chrysotile on the first filter, a mixture of chrysotile plus amosite on the
second filter, and a mixture of chrysotile plus crocidolite plus wollastonite
on the third filter.    The results of EM examination  confirm that this aim was
achieved (Table 23),  the only evidence of contamination being the single amosite
fiber in a sample from the first filter, intended to be pure chrysotile  (sample
2121).   Based on the counts made by the alternative  classification method, about

                                      77

-------
                           .  Table 27




                   PHASE 2 REGRESSION EQUATIONS
              STANDARD METHOD OF FIBER CLASSIFICATION




 (1) Y   = 1.247 + O.
 (2) Y12 = 2.629 + Q.704(X]L) + 0.117(X9D - 0.174(X13L) -  0.066(X13Q)





 (3) Y3  = - 0.183 + 0.084(X1D + O.OSS^Q) + 0.038(X9D





 (4) Y   = - 2.907 + 0.116(X.,L) + O.OSSCX^)





 (5) Y14 - - 5.283 + O.SlSCXjL) + 0.134(X1Q)





 (6) Y13 = 0.523 - 0.062(X9Q) + 0.103(X13L) + 0
            ALTERNATIVE METHOD OF FIBER CLASSIFICATION




 (7) YU - 1.458 + 0.344(X1L)





 (8) Y12 = 2.876 + 0.735(XjL) + 0.219(X^L)





 (9) Y3  = - 0.274 + 0.108CX.JL) + 0.041(X1Q)





(10) YX  = - 2.929 + O.ISSCX^) + 0.043(X1Q)





(11) Y14 = - 5.418 + 0.378(X1L) -t- 0.126(3^)







          METHOD OF FIBER CLASSIFICATION NOT APPLICABLE




(12) Y15 = 1.791 + 0.824(X1L)
                                 78

-------
                 Table 28




PROPERTIES OF PHASE 2 REGRESSION EQUATIONS
Equation Method of Fiber
Number Classification
1 Standard
2
3
4
5
6
7 Alternative
8
9
10
11
12 Inapplicable
Dependent
Variable
Yll
Y12
Y3
Yl
Y14
Y13
Yll
Y12
Y3
Yl
Y14
Y
Residual
Degrees of
Freedom
7
4
5
6
6
5
7
6
6
6
6
7
Residual
Standard
Deviation
0.1380
0.1276
0.0428
0.0664
0.1679
0.1002
0.1923
0.1099
0.0705
0.0683
0.1792
0.4487
R2
Percent
82
98
92
80
84
82
73
98
77
84
86
74
                      79

-------
99.8% of the fibers on the first filter were chrysotile; about 95.9% of the
fibers on the second filter were chrysotile  and  about 4.1% were amosite; on
the third filter about 47.5% of the fibers were chrysotile, 29.1% were croci-
dolite, and 23.4% were wollastonite.
     The number and mass concentrations of chrysotile fibers on the three
filters varied substantially.  This is evident from the estimates of these quan-
tities given in Table 24, with concurrence between the standard and alternative
classification methods.  (Note that the first group of three samples came from
the first filter, the second group of three from the second filter, and the
third group of three from the third filter.)  The pattern is a marked increase
in both the number and mass concentrations of chrysotile fibers in the progres-
sion from the first to the second to the third filter.  This trend is also
clearly revealed by equations 1, 2, 7, and 8 (Table 27) in which the linear
variable associated with the filter preparations, XL, appears with positive
coefficients.
The Three Transfer Methods—
     The three transfer methods employed in grid preparation were:  (1) Soxhlet 1,
(2) Soxhlet 1 with carbon coating, and (3) Jaffe, also with carbon coating
(Table 7).  The candidate coded independent variables representing possible
differences in performance of the transfer method are X_L and X.Q.  The regres-
sion analysis revealed significant differences in relation to Y.-, i.e., natural
logarithm of chrysotile mass concentration.  Variable XqL appears in both equa-
tions 2 and 8 with positive coefficients.  The indicated effect is an increase
in the estimated mass concentration of chrysotile fibers as the transfer method
is changed from Soxhlet 1 to Soxlet 1 with carbon coating to Jaffe.  The effect
is manifest regardless of the method of fiber classification.
     Further effects of transfer method are significant in two of the equations
based on data in which the standard fiber classification method was employed,
i.e., equations 3 and 6 (see Table 27).  The dependent variable in equation 3
is Y , the natural logarithm of the geometric mean length of chrysotile  fibers.
The independent variable X»L is in the equation with a positive coefficient.
The effect brought out is a trend in the direction of increasing length  of
chrysotile fibers in changing from Soxhlet 1 to Soxhlet 1 with carbon coating
to Jaffe.   The dependent variable in equation 6 is Y   , representing the per-
centage of fibers classified as exceptional under the standard classification
                                      80

-------
 method.   In this equation, the independent variable XqQ (having coded values of
 1, -2,  and 1) is present with a negative coefficient.  The indicated effect is
 that the percentage of all fibers classified as exceptional tends to be higher
 when the transfer method is Soxhlet 1 with carbon coating than when the trans-
 fer method is either Jaffe or Soxhlet 1 without carbon coating.
 The Three Fiber Identification Techniques—
      The three techniques employed in identifying fiber types were:  (1) mor-
 phology plus X-ray fluorescence, (2) morphology plus electron diffraction, and
 (3) morphology plus X-ray fluorescence plus electron diffraction (Table 7).  The
 candidate coded independent variables representing possible differences in per-
 formance of the identification techniques are X _L and X _Q.  In the regression
 analyses, differential performance of the three techniques emerged as statis-
 tically significant in two of the equations, 2 and 6 (Table 27).  The dependent
 variable in equation 2 is Y  , natural logarithm of estimated mass concentration
 of chrysotile fibers on the filter.  Independent variables X ,L and X ,Q are in
 the equation with negative coefficients.  The pattern of effects is that the
 third technique of fiber identification (morphology in conjunction with both
 X-ray fluorescence and electron diffraction) tends to result in lower estimates
 of chrysotile mass concentration than the first two techniques.  Note, however,
 that this effect was not significant when all fibers were assigned to the chemi-
 cal species on the basis of the available evidence (alternative classification
 method).
      The other equation in which the performance of the identification tech-
 niques  differs has the dependent variable Y  , which represents the percentage
 of fibers classified as exceptional.  In this equation, No. 6, both X 3L and
 X _Q are included with positive coefficients.  The pattern of effects is that
 the third identification technique (morphology plus X-ray fluorescence plus
 electron diffraction) results in the highest percentage of exceptional (ambig-
 uous or  other) fibers, the second technique (morphology plus electron diffrac-
 tion) results in the lowest percentage of exceptional fibers, while the first
 technique (morphology plus X-ray fluorescence) results in an intermediate per-
 centage  of exceptional fibers.
 Selected Plots
      Significant findings from the analysis of the Phase 2 data are illustrated
                                   -,
by  the confidence-interval  plots of Figures 7 through 10.  The estimated number
                                       81

-------
0)
4J
    4.0
     3.5
     3.0
     2.5
0)
CH


2
2.0
    1.5
    1.0
    0.5 -
              I
                     I
            2113  2121  2132        2211  2222  2233        2312  2323  2331


                              Phase 2 Samples (See Table 7)



   Figure 7.   Estimated number concentration of chrysotile fibers in the nine

              Phase 2 samples (standard classification method), with 95%

              confidence intervals.


                                        82

-------
  B,

o\

 o
  C
  o
 4-1
 c
    50
    "
    35
  S  30
  a
  o
  y

  W  or
  »  ^J

  X
  O
  en
  ?*,
  H

 6
    20
i c

15
    10
Figure 8.
                                          Solid Lines:

                                         Dashed Lines:
                                                    Standard Method

                                                    Alternative Method
                       •

                    Tt

       F
                                                            T

                                                            t
                                              T     T

                                                                             •
                                                                             I
                                                                     I
                          l
             o
             CO
              o co
              CO 0
+ +    T)
iH 4J  (3
•H -H  O
4J iH  4-1
                        ,C O O
                        u »-i a
                                       4-1

                                     4J Cd


                                     r-H O
                                 O O


                                   M


                                   O


                                   O

                                   25
                    i—i w
                    •a°
                                               4J 4-1
                                               •H CO
                                                   >4-IO
O
                                                              >>
                                                              60
          O f£

          CX. X

          o +
+   c
  c o
E*. O -H

o' •«; o
1-1 o cd1
O"-CU' 'W
43 rH'.H-l
                                                                      +
                                                                             rn


                                                                             r2
                                             o
                                             oo
O Wi -H
iH 4-1 4-1  I
O 0 0 X
J3 0) cfl

                  Filter

                  Composition

                   (a)
                                      Transfer Method     X



                                          (b)
                                       13*
               Identification

               Technique

                  (c)
       Estimated mass concentration of chrysotile  fibers in Phase 2  (standard

       and  alternative classification methods)  in  relation to filter

       composition, transfer  method, and identification technique, with 90%

       confidence intervals.
                                         83

-------
   1.1
   1.0
 e
4-i
CO
c
• Q)
   0.9
•H
 d>
rH
•H

 o 0.8
 cc


I"
   0.7
   0.6
                Tt
                4-1
                O
                CO
     01
   CD 4-1
   4-1 -H
01  T) C
r-l  rH O
•H  O 4-1
4-1  TJ CD
O  -rl CO
CO  U rH
•H  (U
4-1  4J
O  iH
CO  CO

r"1  9
t_j  C9
^4  £3
^J  -
-------
   50
   40
   30
   20
   10
          o
        OOO
   c
   o
CM ,a
4-1  td
0) U

3-S3
O -H  O
                              01
                              <4-l
                              4-i
                              C8
                                                 OC
                                                 O
                                                 OX
^  O
00 C iH
O O 4->
r-l Vi O
O 4-J C8
43 O }-i
O. 01 M-l
Ij _,pj ^4*4

O W -H
                                                         >.   O
                                                         00 C -H
                                                         O O W
                                                             O
                                                                   O
                                                                  ,C
                                                           O >-i «
                                                           0) M-l »S
                                                           T-< M-I i
                                                           W-HX
X :  Transfer Method

 y       (a)
                                                   Identification Technique

                                                            (b)
Figure 10.   Estimated percent  of  all Phase 2 fibers  that were exceptional
             (ambiguous or other by the standard  classification method)  in
             relation to transfer  method and identification technique,

             with 90% confidence intervals.
                                      85

-------
 concentrations of  chrysotile  fibers in the nine  samples  (standard classification
 method) are  shown  in Figure 7.  The confidence intervals were  computed at the
 95% probability  level, assuming a Polsson distribution of  fibers.  The increas-
 ing number concentration  of chrysotile fibers in the  successive filter prepara-
 tions  is  clearly evident.  Also apparent is  substantial variation in the esti-
 mates  of  the number concentration between samples within filters.
     In Figures  8^ 9, and 10,  the plotted values were computed from the Phase 2
 regression equations, showing the effects of the controlled experimental factors.
 Each point estimate has an associated 90% confidence  interval.  First, the
 point  values and confidence limits of the various dependent variables, i.e.,
 Y „, Y_,  and Y  ,,  were computed for specified combinations of  values of the inde-
  _L^    J      J..J
 pendent variables  in the  equations.  Then the computed values  of the dependent
 variables were  converted  back to customary physical units  by inverse transfor-
 mations,  e.g.,  the exponential transformation of values of the logarithmic
 dependent variables.
     Significant differences  in estimated mass concentrations  of chrysotile are
 displayed in Figure 8.  Results obtained using the standard method of fiber
 classification,  derived from  equation 2, are denoted  by the confidence inter-
 vals drawn as solid lines.  Results obtained using the alternative (forced)
 method of fiber  classification, derived from equation 8, are denoted by the
 dashed-line  confidence intervals.  There is  a very marked  increase in chrysotile
 mass concentration in the three successive filter preparations, based on either
 the standard or  alternative method of fiber  classification. The significant
 increase  in  the  estimated chrysotile mass concentration as the transfer method
 is changed from  Soxhlet 1 without carbon deposition to Soxhlet 1 with carbon
 deposition,  and  finally to Jaffe, is also evident regardless of fiber classifi-
 cation method.   With respect  to Identification technique,  the  significant con-
 trast  is  between the third technique (morphology together  with both X-ray
 fluorescence and electron diffraction) versus the other  two when the standard
 classification method is  used:  under these  conditions the requirement of a
 consensus of morphological, X-ray, and electron  evidence understandably tends
 to result in a lower estimate  of the chrysotile  mass  concentration.  The con-
 trast  disappears, however, when the exceptional  fibers are assigned to the most
probable  chemical species.
     Figure  9 illustrates the  significant contrasts that are implicit in equa-
tion 3.  Geometric mean length of chrysotile fibers was  smallest in the second
                                      86

-------
 filter preparation,  largest in the third.   Estimated geometric mean  fiber  length
 increased  in  step with the three qualitative levels of transfer method, with  the
 Jaffe method  indicated to  result in somewhat the longest  fibers.
     Factors  influencing the percent of all fibers classified  as  ambiguous or
 other under the  standard classification method,  are illustrated in Figure  10,
 based on equation 6.   Considering the three transfer methods tested,  Soxhlet  1
 with carbon deposition appears to result in a somewhat higher  percentage of
 exceptional fibers  than the other two methods.   The identification technique  of
 electron diffraction in conjunction with fiber morphology resulted in the  lowest
 percentage of exceptional  fibers,  the combined technique  of both  X-ray fluores-
 cence and  electron  diffraction in conjunction with morphology  resulted in  the
 highest percentage.
 Summary
     The Phase 2 data support the choice of the  Jaffe method of transfer of
 fibers to  the EM grid and  the choice of electron diffraction plus morphology  as
 the  technique for fiber identification.
 RESULTS AND DISCUSSION OF  PHASE 3
 Phase 3 Objectives
     Phase 3  evaluated the capabilities of  two instruments working in the  secon-
 dary electron imaging (SEM)  mode.   Both instruments were  capable  of analyzing
 small particles by means of  an X-ray fluorescence probe.   The  instruments  were
 the  JEOL JSM  50A, a modern high quality instrument designed primarily for  SEM
 operation; and the JEOL 100C analytical electron microscope.   Identical areas
 on marker  grids were  observed using the two microscopes.   A pseudo-random
 sequence was  used in  analyzing samples  to avoid  biases.   The data from Phase  3
 are  summarized in Table 29.
 Discussion of  Phase 3 Results
     The results from Phase  3 were  not  subjected to statistical analysis because
 the information needed from  Phase 3 could be obtained by  a less rigorous evalua-
 tion of the data.  Additionally, because of the  need for  key-punching, computer
 runs, and  statistical  analysis,  the total analysis becomes very time  consuming.
     The results from tests  1,  2, 5,  and 6  gave  the difference in the values
obtained for fiber counts when the  identical areas were observed  using the
JEOL 100C and JSM 50A  instruments,  both  in  SEM mode.   In  the two  instances where
                                      87

-------
                                                   Table  29

                                           SUMMARY OF PHASE 3 DATA
Test
No.
]
2
3
1*
5
6
oo 7
00
8
9
Compos i t ion1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
Identification
Method2
M
M+X
M
M+X
M
M
M
M
M+X
Instrument
Used for
SEM
100C
50A
IOOC
100C
IOOC
50A
50A
IOOC
100C3
Total Area
Examined
x lO-W
2.16*
2.16*
2.16
1.44
1 . 44**
] . /,!,**
0.72
0.72***
0.72***
Total No.
of Fibers
104
88
127
50
114
87
42
126
153
Number of Fibers of Each Type of Fiber
Chrysotile Amosite Crocidolite Wollastonitt
104
58
127
23 3
106 8
74 13
31 65
106 12 8
58 53 9

Ambiguous



24




33
Mixture Composition

1.   Chrysot ile
2.   Chrysotile  and Amosite
3.   Chrysotile  and Crocidolite
    and Wollastoni te
2  M =  Morphology
   X =  X-ray Analysis

3  IOOC used in STEM Mode
*,**,*** Identical
Areas Examined

-------
a direct comparison was made, the JEOL 100C gave higher number of fibers; 18%
higher from tests 1 and 2, and 31% higher from tests 5 and 6.  A further com-
parison was made between the use of the scanning transmission mode  (STEM),
test 9, and the SEM mode, test 8, both measuring fibers ,on identical areas using
the  JEOL  100C instrument.  The test showed a significant improvement on the
fiber count, 21%, when using the STEM mode.  The reason for the increase in the
fiber count was observed under the JSM 50A and JEOL 100C using the  SEM mode and
the JEOL 100C using the STEM mode probably results from the respective resolu-
tion capabilities of the instruments.  The claimed resolution limits of the
JSM 50A and JEOL 100C in SEM mode and the JEOL 100C in STEM mode are claimed to
be 7 nm, 4 nm, and 2 .nm, respectively.  In addition, the STEM mode  gives an
image on the fluorescent screen with higher contrast and consequently fibers
are more obvious.  One reason for the improved resolution results from the
higher accelerating voltage (100 kv) used with the JEOL 100C as opposed to the
40 kv used with the JSM 50A.
     Tests were made to consider the difference in the fiber counts when differ-
ent areas were observed using the same instrument.  From tests 1 and 3 using the
JEOL 100C, it can be seen that from different areas (openings) of the same grid
gave results which varied from 104 fibers in test 1, to 127 fibers  for test 3,
a difference of 22%.
     In combination, the results obtained from using different instruments and
observing different areas (openings) of the same grid, the difference in the
results can be very large indeed.  Tests 2 and 3 compared the results obtained
from the JEOL 100C and JSM 50A when different areas (openings) of the same grid
were interrogated; test 2 gave 88 fibers while test 3 gave 127 fibers, a dif-
ference of 45%.  Similarly, test 4 gave 50 fibers while test 5 gave 114 fibers,
a difference of 128%.  Again, test 7 gave 42 fibers while test 8 gave 126 fibers,
a difference of 200%.
     It should be noted that in every case, the results from the JSM 50A were
lower than when the JEOL 100C was used (see Table 29).
     A further test was made to compare the results from the JEOL 100C in STEM
mode with those from a different area on the same grid using the SEM mode.  The
results from tests 9 and 7, respectively, showed a very large, 264%, increase
in fiber counts being noted when the STEM mode was used.
                                      89

-------
     Tests  2, 4, and 9 indicate that when X-ray analysis is used  for  fiber type
 identification, a  substantial proportion, 34%, 48%, and 22%, respectively, of
 all  the  fibers cannot be classified.  This is because  the X-ray yield from the
 fiber  is too  low,  or is ambiguous.  The  results do not indicate any trends in
 terms  of the  instrument used or the fiber type to be identified.   It  should be
 noted, however, that more  detailed studies could reveal such trends.
     A final  test,'which was not part of the original  Phase 3  effort, was  added
 because  of  its obvious pertinence to the overall objectives of the study.   The
 test evaluated the performance of the superior SEM instrument, the JEOL 100C,
 against  the same instrument operating in the conventional TEM  mode.  Six iden-
 tical  grid  openings were scanned in both SEM and TEM modes; the results are
 given  in Table 30.  Fibers were recognized by morphology alone.   It can be seen
 that the TEM  mode  gives consistently higher fiber counts  (with an average  over
 six grid openings)  of plus 79%.  Stationary image of the conventional TEM  mode
 is less  fatiguing  to the eye than a scanning image.
     Application of t-test shows that this difference  is quite significant
 (t value of 2.27 is significant at 5% probability for  10 degrees  of freedom).
 Conclusions from Phase 3
     The conclusions drawn from Phase 3  are as follows:
     1.   In  secondary electron imaging  mode  (SEM), the higher resolution
          JEOL 100C gave consistently higher values than the JSM  50A.
     2.   The X-ray probe  analysis indicated that approximately one-third  of
          the fibers could not be positively identified even when laboratory
          prepared  samples were utilized.  The JSM 50A X-ray probe was easier
          to  use than the  JEOL 100C in that it gave higher count  rates and
          could be  operated at a lower tilt angle.
     3.   Higher fiber counts are obtained with higher resolution equipment.
          .When compared with the JEOL 100C, SEM, the counts were  improved  by
          21% when  switching to the STEM mode and 79%  (average of six) in  the
          conventional TEM mode.  Thus,  the conventional TEM is the desired
          mode for  asbestos analysis.
PHASE 4  RESULTS
     Phase 4 was designed  to evaluate parameters of ashing,  ultrasonification,
and reconstitution of samples.
     Table 31  summarizes results from Phase 4 for fiber number concentration
and mass  concentration.   Table 32 summarizes results on dimensions of observed
                                      90

-------
                    Table 30

DIFFERENCE IN NUMBER OF CHRYSOTILE FIBERS COUNTED
 WHEN SAME GRID OPENINGS ARE OBSERVED UNDER SEM
     AND CONVENTIONAL TEM MODE IN JEOL 100C


No. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
AVERAGE VALUES
STD. DEVIATIONS
STD. EFFOR OF
MEAN
SEM1

Fibers
48
18
38
31
48
48
38.5
12.23

4.99
CTEM2

No. Fibers
100
24
62
51
104
72
68.8
30.31

12.37
*
Increase
TEM Over
SEM
108
33
63
65
116
50
79



1 SEM 100 kv, 0° tilt, 10,OOOX (secondary electron
  mode).

2 CTEM 100 kv, 0° tilt, 16,OOOX (conventional
  transmitted electron image).
                        91

-------
vo
NJ
                                                    Table  31


                                 ESTIMATING CHRYSOTILE ASBESTOS IN PHASE 4 SAMPLES
                                      (ASHING AND BONIFICATION EXPERIMENTS)
Sample
Numbert
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210*
1211*
Area
Examined
10-4 Cm2
3.2
6.4
1.92
1.28
5.12
1.92
1.28
2.56
4.48
2.56
2 . 56
Fiber Concentration
Estimate, 106/cm2
of Filter
0.4531
0.1672
0.6719
0.7891
0.1973
0.5573
0.8594
0.4023
0.2857
0.4922
0.3750
Mass Concentration
Estimate, 10~9 gm/cm2
of Filter
2.287
3.471
6.913
7.903
1.829
7.402
14.43
6.693
3.160
8.712
17.53
                 t For explanation of tb,e  sample number, please see  Tables 9  and 13.

                 * Unashed.

-------
OJ
                                                     Table  32

                      SIZE DISTRIBUTION CHARACTERISTICS OF  CHRYSOTILE FIBERS IN PHASE 4 SAMPLES
                                       (ASHING AND BONIFICATION EXPERIMENTS)
Length ym
Sample
Humbert
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210*
1211*
Mean
0
1
0
0
0
0

1
0
1
1
.6341
.0135
.8819
. 9039
.9689
.9661
.9386
.0238
.6818
.2255
.6383
Std.
Dev.
0.3659
2.2693
1.0231
1.1187
0.6788
1.6861
0,7594
0.8998
0.3960
1.2621
2.7305
Mean
Ln (Length)
-0.5832
-0.4734
-0.3766
-0.3483
-0.2458
-0.4686
-0.2776
-0.2653
-0.5319
-0.1019
0.1311
Diameter
Mean
0.0556
0.0552
0.0601
0.0600
0.0588
0.0575
0.0672
0.0663
0.0636
0.0430
0.0572
Std.
Dev.
0.0260
0.0432
0.0391
0.0364
0.0311
0.0358
0.0417
0.0406
0.0411
0.0308
0.0417
pm
Mass fLO"14
Mean
Ln (Dia.)
-2
-3
-2
-2
-2
-3
-2
-2
-2
-3
-3
.9906
.0887
.9847
.9604
.9562
.0003
.8544
.8615
.9089
.2829
.0089
Mean
0.5048
2.076
1.029
1.002
0.9270
1 . 328
1.679
1.663
1.106
1.770
4.676
Std.
Dev.
0.6670
8.394
2.812
2.413
1.382
4.402
4.031
4.438
3.634
12.79
36.26
gm)
Mean
Ln (Mass)
-33.4816
-33.5678
-33.2831
-33.1862
-33.0753
-33.3863
-32.9035
-32.9053
-33.2669
-33.5848
-32.5261
      t  For explanation  of the  sample number, please see Tables  9 and  13.

      *  Unashed.

-------
 fibers  in Phase  4.  Tables  31 and 32 also list results on two initial  filters,
 one  polycarbonate and one cellulose acetate, studied without the ashing  and
 reconstitution step.
 Dependent Variables in Phase 4
      The dependent variables in Phase 4 are as follows.

                        DEPENDENT VARIABLES, PHASE 4

            Variable     _ Definition     _
              Y  -       Square root of estimated number of  chrysotile
fibers per square centimeter of filter
Natural log of estimated mass concentration
of chrysotile fib
square centimeter
                .«
                         of  chrysotile fibers on filter, nanograms per
               Y_        Mean  of natural log of chrysotile  fiber
                        lengths (ym)
 Regression Analysis
      The dependent variable Y   was subjected to a square  root  transformation
 and Y -  to a log transformation to normalize the distributions.   Similarly,
 variable Y» was  chosen as the mean of the natural log  of length of  the  indivi-
 dual fibers.                                       -
      Regressions were performed on each of the dependent variables  using  step-
 wise regression  program BMD02R from the BMD library of statistical  programs.
 The data input to the program included coded values of the independent  vari-
 ables found in Table 9 and the values of dependent variables  listed in  Table 33.
      The mean values and standard deviation of the dependent  variables  are
 listed in Table  34.  The resulting regression equations are given in Table 35.
 In  any given equation, only those independent variables appear  that have  coef-
 fients significant at the 20% probability level.
     Each of the  equations describes a relationship between a dependent variable
and the various independent variables.
     The net effects and their confidence limits are shown graphically  in
Figures 11 and 12.

                                      94

-------
                                   Table  33




                  VALUES OF DEPENDENT VARIABLES IN PHASE 4
Fiber Concentration
Sample
Number*
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
106 Fibers
2
per cm
0.4531
0.1672
0.6719
0.7891
0.1973
0.5573
0.8594
0.4023
0.2857
Square Root
of Fiber
Concentration
Yn
l-L
0.6731
0.4089
0.8197
0.8833
0.4442
0.7465
0.9270
0.6343
0.4537
Mass
10~8 Gran
per cm
0.2287
0.3471
0.6913
0.7903
0.1829
0.7402
1.443
0.6693
0.3160
Concentration
Natural Log
of Mass
is Concentration
V
LZ.
-1.4753
-1.0581
-0.3692
-0.2353
-1.6988
-0.3008
0.3667
-0.4015
-1.1520
Mean Ln
(length)
YT
j
-0.5832
-0.4734
-0.3966
-0.3483
-0.2458
-0.4686
-0.2776
-0.2653
-0.5319
* For explanation of the sample number,  please see Tables  9  and  13.
                                       95

-------
                               Table 34

    MEANS  AND  STANDARD  DEVIATIONS  OF DEPENDENT VARIABLES IN PHASE 4
Regression                                                    Standard
 Equation      	Variable	       Mean      Deviation

     6         Y   Square root of chrysotile      0.6662       0.1966
                   fiber concentration
                   (million fibers/cm2
                   filter)

     7         Y   Natural log of mass           -0.7027       0.6748
                   concentration of chryso-
                   tile (10~9 gm/cm2 filter)

     8         Y   Mean log of chrysotile        -0.399        0.1229
                   fiber length (micrometers)
                               Table 35

                    REGRESSION EQUATIONS  IN  PHASE  4
            Phase 4

            (6) Yn - 0.6619 - 0.0781(X15L) + 0.0852(X  Q)


            (7) Y12 - - 0.7027


            (8) Y3  = - 0.3990 + 0.0478(XUQ) - 0.0354(X15Q)
                                   96

-------
vD
•vj

C X""N
6 H
•H CD
1 1 Ik
4-J 4-J
tfl rH
If l^j
o c
•M Q) M-l
0 O
C C
O O C"N
•HUB
+J 0
3 !-i
fi 0) ^
•H ,Q OJ
M -H O.
Jj f-^.
C ca
O *|i I 1 1
u o 
-------
VO
oo
60
O
C
CO / — s
gj E
S— i
j- •-
o
4-1 43
4-1
C 60
o c
•H V
4J h4
42 H
•H 
-------
Interpretation of Phase 4 Results
Square Root of Fiber Concentration of Chrysotile—
     Figure 11 shows that high energy ultrasonification increases the fiber
concentration as compared with the medium energy ultrasonification.  This is
most probably due to the disruption  of fibrils into shorter fibrils as
evidenced by the decrease in the mean fiber length (see Figure 12).
     It is difficult to rationalize why low energy ultrasonification (which
is conducted in a different sonifying equipment than the medium and high
energy ultrasonification) should give the highest estimate of chrysotile
fiber concentration and also the smallest mean fiber length.
     Figure 12 shows that high temperature ashing results in shorter fibrils
as compared with the low temperature ashing, presumably because of the vio-
lent nature of high temperature ashing.  This conclusion may be interpreted
to mean that low temperature ashing is preferable to the high temperature
ashing.  Also from Table 32, it is clear that mean fiber length is larger for
the unashed samples than that for both low temperature ashing and high tempera-
ture ashing.  This suggests that ashing may be shortening the fiber length.
Cumulative Size Distributions for Chrysotile Fibers—
     The mean fiber length and width are susceptible to a large variation if a
few large fibers are present in the group of fibers observed.  Hence, a cumu-
lative distribution of length and width for all eleven samples are listed in
Tables 36 and 37, respectively.
     It is clear that the maximum value of length of fiber in each  sample
is different, but minimum length is almost constant.  The different percentile
10th, 20th, . . . 90th values show that the length is always lower (regardless
of which ashing and ultrasonification treatment is employed) than that for the
unashed samples.  Thus, qualitatively one can conclude that the ashing and
ultrasonification treatments chosen in this study lead to a shortening of the
length of fibers and hence should be used very cautiously.
     From Table 37, it appears that width does not show much change or any
consistent trends of alteration.
Number Concentration of Chrysotile Fibers—
     In the data, we have nine samples studied with various combinations of
ashing and sonification treatment and two samples studied directly  (without

                                        99

-------
o
o
                                                               Table 36




                                 CHARACTERISTICS OF FIBER LENGTH IN CUMULATIVE DISTRIBUTION IN PHASE 4
Sample Code
Length (urn) :
Minimum
Maximum
Median
Maximum Length for
(percentile) :
10th*
20th
30th
40th
50th
60th
70th
80th
90th
1201

2,0
20.0
4.129

2.0
2.933
2.99
4.035
4.129
4.865
5.009
5.943
8.171
1202

1.0
175.0
4.115

1.966
2.853
2.993
3.869
4.115
4.968
6.153
8.328
15.00
1203

.2.0
80.0
4.945

2.00
2.987
3.905
4.063
4.945
5.713
6.723
9.486
12.119
1204

2.0
80.0
5.018

2.965
3.091
4.000
4.144
5.018
5.685
6.649
7.962
9.982
1205

2.0
30.0
6.011

3.011
3.153
4.086
4.973
6.011
6.786
7.994
11.779
14.744
1206

1.0
100.0
3.957

2.000
3.036
3.173
3.836
3.957
4.799
5.042
7.329
11.569
1207

2.0
40.0
5.143

2.927
3.887
4.005
4.947
5.143
6.073
8.041
9.753
14.445
1208

2.0
40.0
5.948

2.000
2.948
3.915
4.999
5.948
6.237
8.214
10.011
19.627
1209

1.0
20.0
4.212

2.018
3.001
3.095
4.068
4.212
4.934
5.844
7.800
8.121
1210

1.0
80.0
7.543

2.922
3.924
5.035
5.791
7.548
8.020
10.308
12.248
15.019
1211

2.0
200.0
8.49

3.925
4.827
5.757
8.125
8.492
9.765
11.532
14.042
21.136
             * 10th refers to the 10th percentile of the distribution.  The numbers in this row refer to the

               maximum length in each sample, for the IQth percentile.

-------
                                      Table 37

        CHARACTERISTICS OF FIBER WIDTH IN CUMULATIVE DISTRIBUTION IN PHASE 4
Sample Code
Width (ym) :
Minimum
Maximum
Median
Maximum Width for
(percentile) :
10th*
20th
30th
40th
50th
60th
70th
80th
90th
1201

0.2
1.0
0.397

0.200
0.295
0.298
0.302
0.397
0.404
0.501
0.604
0.802
1202

0.1
2.0
0.305

0.197
0.201
0.295
0.300
0.305
0.311
0.409
0.572
0.976
1203

0.1
2.0
0.402

0.197
0.203
0.298
0.306
0.402
0.416
0.491
0.688
0.984
1204

0.1
2.0
0.400

0.199
0.295
0.301
0.307
0.400
0.415
0.503
0.603
0.803
1205

0.2
1.2
0.399

0.200
0.298
0.302
0.306
0.399
0.406
0.500
0.598
0.804
1206

0.100
2.000
0.398

0.199
0.294
0.300
0.306
0.398
0.412
0.482
0.584
0.798
1207

0.200
2.000
0.415

0.200
0.291
0.299
0.405
0.415
0.495
0.589
0.801
0.831
1208

0.200
2.000
0.411

0.200
0.293
0.299
0.404
0.411
0.484
0.582
0.800
0.833
1209

0.200
2.000
0.408

0.200
0.291
0.296
0.302
0.408
0.481
0.581
0.599
0.825
1210

0.2
2.0
0.291

0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.291
0.295
0.300
0.408
0.493
1211

0.2
2.0
0.30

0.2
0.2
0.2
0.29
0.300
0.408
0.488
0.596
0.971
* 10th refers to the 10th percentile of the distribution.  The numbers in this row
  refer to the maximum length in each sample for the 10th percentile.

-------
ashing).   We may compare the chrysotile fiber number concentration in these
two groups.

                CHRYSOTILE FIBER NUMBER CONCENTRATION 106/cm2 in
                      ASHED SAMPLES AND IN UNASKED SAMPLES
                                 Nine Ashed Samples  "   Two Unashed Samples
     Mean Value of Fiber
Number Concentration
Standard Deviation
Standard Error of Mean
Variance
0.4870
0.2510
0.0837
0.00700
0.4336
0.0829
0.0586
0.00343
                        t .   0.4840 -  0.4336   = c
                            /O.00700 + 0.00343
This t-value is not statistically significant with 9 degrees of freedom, thus
indicating that the slight increase in chrysotile number concentration in the
ashed samples compared with the unashed samples is unimportant.
     It should be noted here that in preparing these filters, carbon-coating was
                                                                      I
not used, because some filters were cellulose acetate.  Thus, the fibers on the
Phase 4 filters were not locked and during the Jaffe wash may have resulted in
a variable loss.  This possibility may have made the evaluation of ashing and
Bonification variables difficult.
     Although the length distribution data suggest that ashing and ultrasonifi-
cation treatments tend to decrease the length of fibers, the fiber concentra-
tion estimates suggest that the effect of ashing is not significant.
                                        102

-------
                MASS CONCENTRATION OF CHRYSOTILE nanogram/cm2 IN
                        ASHED SAMPLES AND UNASHED SAMPLES
                                 Nine Ashed Samples     Two Unashed Samples
     Mean of Mass
     Concentration,
nanogram/cm^
Standard Deviation
Standard Error of Mean
2
(Standard Error)
6.0098
3.9308
1.3103
1.71680
13.121
6.2353
4.4090
19.43965
                         fc     13.121 - 6.0098 ..
                             /I.71680 + 19.43965
     This t-value for 9 degrees of freedom is significant at a probability
between 10 and 20%.  It indicates that the average mass concentration of chryso-
tile in the ashed samples is lower than that in the unashed samples.  This sug-
gests some loss of chrysotile during ashing and reconstitution step.
     Clearly, more work is required to establish, quantitatively, the effects of
ashing and sonification treatment.  Redeposition filters should be polycarbonate
and these should be coated with evaporated carbon to lock all particulates prior
to Jaffe wash.
     One possible explanation for the failure to detect strong alteration in
fiber characteristics due to ashing subprocedure is that the initial stock solu-
tions had been subjected to high energy ultrasonics to break down the fibers to
a small enough stable size.  Thus, a subsequent ashing and ultrasonic treatment
had only a marginal effect on the fiber dimensions.  One needs a sample that has
not seen prior ultrasonic treatment.
     Another possible area for future work is the effect of diluting the sample
(without ashing).  This can be done by dissolving the primary filter with
particulate matter in a suitable solvent and then to redeposit it, after appro-
priate dilution, onto a polycarbonate filter.
Phase 4 Conclusions
     1.    Ashing and ultrasonic treatments should be used only when direct
          sample preparation and examination are not possible.  These cases

                                        103

-------
          include presence of organic matter or high total particle density on
          primary filter.
     2.    Since ashing and reconstitution involves elaborate procedure, much
          care is necessary in handling the products.
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS OF PHASE 5 DATA
The Experiment Design
     In Phase 5, two independent variables were used:  X&, the orientation of
the droplet during drying (face up or down), and X^, the radial location of
the grid opening (position used:  center, mid-radius, or periphery).  A full
factorial experiment was run, with the design indicated in Table 10.  The vari-
ous levels of the independent variables and their codes were also listed in
Table 10.  The dependent variables considered were:  mean Ln liber length and
square root of fiber concentration.  The values of these in the various cases
are given in Table 38, along with their means and standard deviations.  These
data were based on the results of computer analysis given in Table 39, similar
to that used in Phases 2 and 4.
Regression Analysis
     As in Phases 2 and 4, the dependent variable, Y . , fiber concentration, was
subjected to a square root transformation since it is essentially a count of
fibers.  The dependent variable Y  was chosen as mean Ln fiber length.  The Ln
transformation was used to "smooth out" the large variations usually  found in
length measurements and to normalize the distribution.
     Regressions were performed on each of the dependent variables using the
stepwise regression program BMD02R from the BMD library of statistical programs
[59].  The data input to the program included the coded variables of  the inde-
pendent variables found in Table 10 and the values of the dependent variables
from Table 38.
     The resulting regression equations are given below.

                         REGRESSION EQUATIONS - PHASE 5
                          0.5024 - 0.11903(X6) + 0.0514(XUQ)

                          - 0.6025
                                       104

-------
                           Table 38

           VALUES OF DEPENDENT VARIABLES  IN PHASE  5
                                            Variables
Sample
Number
 5101
 5102
 5103
 5104
 5105
 5106
   Square Root of
Fiber Concentrations
     0.6124
     0.4815
     0.7705
     0.4507
     0.3176
     0.3818
  Mean Ln
Fiber Length

  -0.6069
  -0.5058
  -0.6453
  -0.8795
  -0.5469
  -0.4307
 Mean
 Standard Deviation
     0.5024
     0.1648
  -0.6025
  -0.1553
                               105

-------
                   Table 39




FIBER NUMBER AND MASS CONCENTRATION IN PHASE 5
Input mass: 10.3 x 10"9 gm /cm2
Fiber Count
(fibers)
Fiber Concentration
(10 fibers per sq. cm.)
Mass Concentration
_Q
(10 gm per sq. cm. )
Length Mean
(pm) Standard Deviation
Mean Ln
Geom Mean
Diameter Mean
urn) Standard Deviation
Mean Ln
Geom Mean
Mass Mean
(10~14 gm) Standard Deviation
Mean Ln
Geom Mean
5101
24
0.3750
1.963
0.7522
0.7375
-0,6069
0.5451
0.0368
0.0208
-3.4201
0.0327
0 . 5285
1.078
-34.3641
0.1191
5102
89
0.2318
1.312
0.7209
0.4562
-0.5058
0.6030
0.0468
0.0341
-3.2123
0.0403
0.5659
1.611
-33.8474
0.1997
5103
76
0.5937
2.116
0.6681
0.4853
-0.6453
0.5243
0.0412
0.0201
-3.2794 .
0.0377
0.3563
0.7563
-34.1212
0.1518
5104
39
0.2031
1.318
0.5295
0.4069
-0.8795
0.4150
0.0549
0.0301
-3.0318
0.5513
0.6489
1.301
-33.8603
0.1971
5105
71
0.1009
0.8827
0.7417
0.6876
-0.5469
0.5787
0.0613
0.0379
-2.9408
0.0528
0.8752
2.227
-33.3455
0.3298
5106
84
0.1458
1.073
0.7792
0.4776
-0.4307
0.6501
0.0555
0.0274
-3.0010
0.0497
0.7357
1.242
-33.3497
0.3284

-------
In any given equation, only those independent variables appear that have coeffi-
cients significant at the 20% probability level.  That is, an independent varia-
ble did not enter an equation if it was determined that its coefficient value
could have occurred with probability 20% or greater due to accidents of sampling.
It is worthwhile to note each case which independent variables are in a given
equation and which ones are absent.
     These net effects and their confidence limits are shown graphically in
Figure 13.
     The results of the attempted regression of Y_, mean Ln fiber length, on
the independent variables showed no significant effect of any factor at the 80%
confidence level.  That is, all the variation in mean Ln fiber length would
occur by chance with probability at least 20%.
Conclusions from Phase 5
     Phase 5 investigated the effect of placing a drop of liquid containing
fibers in suspension directly onto an EM grid.  The results indicated that sur-
face tension effects tended to move the fibers as the drop dried with the result
that an uneven fiber loading was observed on the grid.
     In particular, as shown graphically in Figure 13, a grid allowed to dry
with the drop facing down gave higher fiber counts than when dried rlghtside up.
Further, a point on the mid-radius of the grid gave lower values than either the
periphery of the grid  or the center of the grid.
     For these reasons, the use of the direct drop method is not recommended.
                                        107

-------
O
co
0.18
c
•H 0.16
•u
2 0.14
4-1
§ 0.12
u
o 0.10
n 0.08
o>
3 0.06
mc^ 0.04
o e
w-Ii 0.02
o co
£ « 0.00
CU -H
% *» -0.02
g& -0.04
o~ -0.06
g -0.08
tj -0.10
43
•H -0.12
i j
g -0.14
u
w -0.16
0)
» -0.18
-0.20



-L
< i
-
J_ _L
•V
••»
•B
•V
••
< )
•V
•••
II 1 1 1

-------
                                    SECTION 9
              PROVISIONAL OPTIMIZED METHOD AND ROUND-ROBIN TESTING

     A provisional method was developed as based on the results of the five-
phase program.  The subprocedures were adjusted to achieve the best precision
(see Table 21).  Some adjustments were made to accommodate practical considera-
tions.  A brief description of the optimized method is given in Appendix D.
Also, procedures or subprocedures which gave inconsistent results or which
altered the initial sample were eliminated from the optimized method.  The
final draft of the detailed manual has been issued separately [64].
ROUND-ROBIN TESTS
     In order to determine the ruggedness of the provisional optimized method,
a round-robin test was planned.  This test was to serve as interlaboratory exper-
ience of the method and provide important feed back to further improve the op-
timized method.  Of the several laboratories sought for participation, the fol-
lowing laboratories offered to cooperate.
     1.   Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC
     2.   Environmental Protection Agency, Athens, GA
     3.   Environmental Protection Agency, Duluth, MN
     4.   National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH
     5.   A.D. Little, Cambridge, MA
     6.   Ontario Ministry of the Environment, Toronto, Ontario Canada
PREPARING CALIBRATION FILTERS
     It would be ideal to prepare filters with known amounts of asbestos, known
size distributions of asbestos fibers, and to use these for round-robin tests.
This would serve as an independent external absolute calibration for evaluating
the absolute accuracy of the electron microscopy method.  The concept of a fully
known and characterized sample proved elusive, since none of the methods could
                                       109

-------
 completely characterize a sample.   Non-microscopic methods would not give size
 distributions,  parameters and fiber counts.   The most one could expect to
 achieve was to  measure the total mass of asbestos per unit area of the filter.
      Even this  apparently easy measurement was  quite difficult to achieve.   Our
 own repeated attempts at estimating chrysotile  mass on filters of Phase 1,  by
 atomic absorption measurements, proved futile because of the very small mass
 involved.
      Being aware of the recent work on neutron  activation technique at AERE,
 Harwell, England, Dr. Morgan was asked to prepare six polycarbonate filters
 with known small mass concentrations of asbestos.  The method consisted of  com-
 pacting UICC asbestos into a disc,  irradiating  it with an intense flux of neu-
 trons in a nuclear reactor, then eroding the disc with an air jet and collecting
 the resulting aerosol on 47 mm diameter polycarbonate filters.  The actual  mass
 of the asbestos deposited on the filter was  measured by radio-activity measure-
 ments of some short-lived isotopes  of rare-earth elements present as trace
 impurities.  With some trial and error, Dr.  Morgan succeeded in depositing
 three different levels of mass concentration on these filters.
      Our own work on two of these calibration filters showed that the filter
 dissolution using Jaffe technique required much longer durations.  Also,  the
 samples  contained a wide size distribution of fibers and several bundles  or
 aggregates of fibers.   One more serious  problem with these samples was that it
 was extremely difficult to obtain good electron diffraction patterns even at
 100 kv.   For these reasons,  these calibration samples were discarded from con-
 sideration in the round-robin test.
 FINAL  CHOICE OF SAMPLES FOR ROUND-ROBIN  TEST
     Following  are two  air samples we selected  for round-robin test.
     1.    Air sample collected under  controlled conditions in our laboratory
           using aerosol generations in Phase 1.   (High-volume samplers, poly-
           carbonate filter,  0.4 Urn pore  size, 708 liters/min for 13 minutes.)
           Standard UICC chrysotile mineral was  used for obtaining the aerosol
           cloud.
     2.   A  field  air sample  collected at the Johns-Manville Plant in Waukegan,
           Illinois.   (High-volume sampler, polycarbonate filter, 0.4 urn pore
          size,  560  liters/min for one hour.)
The provision for  two samples  was meant  to avoid total failure of the round-robin
test, if the field sample posed any unsurmountable problems.
                                      110

-------
INDEPENDENT ESTIMATE OF CHRYSOTILE MASS CONCENTRATIONS
Neutron Activation Analysis^
     Segments representing about half the areas of these filters were dispatched
to Dr. Morgan at AERE, Harwell, England, to estimate the chrysotile mass using
ultrasensitive neutron activation technique.  Our letter is appended (see
Appendix E).  Dr. Morgan's reply explaining the problems, and his inability to
estimate the low mass, is also appended (see Appendix E).
     Fortunately, it was possible to obtain estimates of the chrysotile mass
concentration in the filter deposits by X-ray fluorescence spectrometric analysis
for magnesium.  Fluorescence intensities above background of the Mg-k  line were
measured with a simultaneous multi-wavelength spectrometer (Siemens MRS-3),
adapted for use with thin filter-deposited samples, using procedures described
by Wagman  [65].  Values for chrysotile were derived from magnesium concentration
data, on the basis of the chemical formula Mg_Si 0 (OH),.  Further detailes are
given in Appendix F.
     The chrysotile mass concentration estimates on the two polycarbonate filters
used in the round-robin test, as determined by the X-ray fluorescence method in
Dr. Wagmen's X-ray laboratory, are as follows:
                   Chrysotile Mass   Standard Deviation of          Ratio
                    Concentration      Mass Concentration    Standard Error/Mean
   Air Sample      	yg/m3	   	yg/m3	   	x 100-
Lab Sample 154
Field Sample 661
2.452
57.919
0.096
1.015
1.598
0.715
     It is evident that the X-ray fluorescence method gives highly reproducible
results.  The mass concentration estimate for the laboratory sample should be
fairly accurate, inasmuch as it consisted of high purity chrysotile.  The esti-
mate for the field sample is likely to be too high because some of the magnesium
present is associated with materials other than chrysotile.
     The filter segments were carbon-coated at IITRI laboratory tacked to the
bottom of disposable petri dishes and mailed to each of the participating
                                        111

-------
laboratories along with specific instructions and with copies of the provisional'
method.
     Dr. Anant Samudra visited the participating laboratories to (1) discuss and
demonstrate the fine aspects of the optimized method, (2) to explain the proper
use of the electron diffraction capability of the transmission electron micro-
scopes, and (3) to obtain criticism and comments on the provisional method.  Most
of the electron microscope data were received later in the mail.  These data were
reorganized using fortran coding forms and transferred to key-punch cards.  The
data consisted of 54 sets and required 9,000 cards.  The statistical descriptors
or characterizing parameters were derived for each data set, i.e., for each
separate TEM grid examined.
                                      112

-------
                                   SECTION 10
                   RESULTS AND DISCUSSION OF ROUND-ROBIN TESTS

     The voluminous data from round-robin tests allow several analyses.  It is
proposed to first check the Poisson distribution test and then to study the sum-
maries of statistical descriptors or characterizing parameters for the two air
samples.
POISSON DISTRIBUTION TESTS
Goodness of Fit with Poisson Distribution
     This test requires the data about the number of fibers observed in a field
of view 0, 1, 2 ... etc., and the corresponding frequency of occurrence.  These
data were extracted from the basic electron microscope data of the 54 data sets
mentioned earlier.  The minimum data should consist of 40 fields of view and,
when arranged for fiber frequency, should give a minimum of three class intervals.
     Following the method outlined in Phase 1 analysis, data from round-robin
tests were analyzed by the Poisson 1 program.  The results are summarized in
Table 40.  Of the 54 sets of data, 30 sets are in appropriate form for Poisson
distribution tests.  Our of the 30 tests, 19 conformed definitely to the Poisson
distribution, seven are borderline cases, and only two tests definitely do not
conform to- the Poisson distribution.  In data sets 76 and 77, tests cannot be
applied because they had only two class intervals and, hence, no degree of
freedom.
     The finding that the majority of the sets conform to the Poisson distribu-
tion may be interpreted to mean that the differences in sample preparation and
sample contamination have not altered (or rearranged) the initial random settling
of fibers on the Nuclepore filter.
Confidence Intervals on the Mean Number Concentration
     The Poisson distribution model allows computing intervals, for any given
degree of confience, on the value of X, the mean number of fibers per field.
                                       113

-------
                                           Table 40

      TESTS FOR APPLICABILITY OF THE POISSON DISTRIBUTION TO NUMBER OF FIBERS  PER FIELD
Data
Set
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
31
41
42
43
45
73
74
75
76
77
86
90
91
Size of
Field
cm2xl(T6
0.18
0.725
0.18
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.235
0.309
0.309
0.187
0.187
0.187
0.187
0.187
0.187
0.72
0.19
0.472
0.472
0.18
O.lOSt
O.lOSt
O.lOSt
0.06 t
0.06 t
0.464t
O.lOSt
o.iosf
No. of
Fields
58
28
40
40
62
30
33
43
42
43
37
95
93
89
71
80
113
34
44
21
30
56
102
100
100
100
100
97
100
100
No. of
Fibers
106
106
114
110
108
75
104
105
109
101
78
141
103
106
105
105
104
154
98
101
100
102
27
31
44
19
8
107
59
39
Mean No.
Fibers per
Field, X
1.83
3.79
2.85
2.75
1.74
2.50
3.15
2*44
2.60
2.35
2.11
1.48
1.11
1.19
1.48
1.31
0.92
4.53
2.23
4.81
3.33
1.82
0,26
0.31
0.44
0.19
0.08
1.10
0.59
0.39
Degrees
i of
Freedom
3
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4 .
3
3
2
2
3
3
2
4
4
2
4
3
1
1
1
0
0
2
1
1
Chi
Square
0.61
2.03
4.47-
5.73
10.3
1.35
1.18
8.67
7.77
6.65
8.28
8.59
7,77
1.77
2.09
10.3
25.3
1.39
1.61
0.63
3.33
1.31
6.16
3.40
3.42
0.12
0.40
13.9
4.14
0.30
Probability
0.90>P>0.80
0.80>PXh70
0.30>P>0.20
0.20>P>0.10
0.02>P>0.01
0.80>P>0.70
0.90>P>0.80
0.10>P>0.05
0.20>P>0*10
0.20>P>0.10
0.05>P>0.02
0.05>P>0.02
0.05>P>0.02
0.50>P>0.30
0.70>P>0.50
0.02>P>0.01
0.001>P
0.90>P>0.80
0,90>P>0.80
0.80>P>0.70
0.70>P>0.50
0.80>P>0.70
0.02>P>0.01
0.10>P>0.05
0.10>P>0.05
no test
no test
0.001>P
0.05>P>0.02
0.70>P>0.50
Good Fit
to Poisson
*
*
*
*
(*)
*
A
*
*
*
(*)
(*)
(*)
*
*
(*)

*
*
*
*
*
(*)
*
*



(*)
*
1 Fiber .per Field of
View Represents so much
Fiber Concentration,
106 fibers/m3
245.47
69.94
242.77
188.02
188.02
188.02
188.02
188.02
188.02
142.99
142.99
236.36
236.36
236.36
236.36
236.36
236.36
61*37
232.55
93.61
93.61
245.47
1135.63
1135.63
1135.63
1995.14
1995.14
257.95
1135.63
1135.63
 t  This  takes  into account the dilution factor in ashing also.
 *  Conform to  Poisson.
(*)  Borderline  conformation to Poisson.

-------
In this study we have  obtained  90%  confidence as well as  95%  confidence  limits
on the mean X in each  set  since the size of  the field varies  from one  set  to
another, we normalized all these values  of A and its  confidence  interval to give
the number concentrations  in  standard units  (namely,  106  fibers/m3).   The  nor-
malized values are listed  in  Table  41 and are shown graphically  for the  labora-
tory air sample in Figure  14  for a  quick comparison.
Precision Measured by  Ratio of  Standard  Error of X to the Mean Value of  X
     Precision can be  measured  from the  ratio of standard error  to the mean to
the mean value of X.   These ratios,  expressed as a percentage, are also  listed
in Table 41.  These values appear quite  comparable among  different sets, i.e.,
for different laboratories and  operators (with a few  exceptions  in the case of
the field air sample)  the  precision of the fiber count estimate  is about 10%,
which is quite good.
GENERAL PROCEDURES
     For each of the 54  data  sets,  statistical descriptors  or characterizing
parameters were derived  using a special  fortran program.  These  characterizing
parameters are summarized  for the laboratory air sample in  Table 42 and  for the
field air sample studied with ashing in  Table 43 and  for  the  field sample  studied
without ashing in Table  44.
                                                            f\ ^
     Column 3 lists -  number  concentration of all fibers, 10  /m
     Columns 4 and 5 list  - mean fiber length and mean fiber  diameter, urn
                                           -15   3
     Column 6 lists -  mean fiber volume,  10     cm
                                                            -9    3.3
     Column 7 lists -  volume  concentration of all fibers, 10   cm /m
                                                                   6   3
     Column 8 lists -  number  concentration of chrysotile  fibers, 10 /m
     Columns 9 and 10  list -  mean fiber  length and mean fiber diameter,  \im
     Column 11 lists - mean fiber volume,  10    cm
                                                                  3
     Column 12 lists - chrysotile mass concentration  in air,  yg/m
In Tables 42 through 44, the  numerical values in column 3 are slightly lower
.than the corresponding values listed in  Table 41. This is  because fibers  cros-
sing the perimeter of  the  field of  view  have been treated as  half fibers in
computing fiber concentration in Tables  42 through  44-
                                         115

-------
                                  Table  41

      MEAN  VALUES AND LOWER AND UPPER  LIMITS OF FIBER CONCENTRATION
                 ESTIMATE  ACCORDING TO  POISSON DISTRIBUTION

Data
Set
SAMPLE
1
41
42
43
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
21
22
23
24
25
26
31
18
19


Lab
154
RTF
RTF
RTF
RTF
Athens
NIOSH
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
Duluth
Ontario
Ontario
Number Cone.
of all Fibers
106 Fibers/m3
Mean

448.72
517.89
450.27
312.01
230.72
691.90
517.06
327.53
470.05
592.64
459.15
487.91
350.76
261.90
281.51
349.58
310.10
(217.46)
277.93
355.89
301.43
any
J \J/O
Confidence

Lower

379.50
434.87
379.13
262.58
195.14
588.97
438.65
277.52
384.50
500.32
387.88
413.64
303.73
220.76
238.02
295.45
262.12
(183.65)
242.16
282.84
247.52

Limits

Upper ,

527.27
612.54
531.15
368.46
271.14
808.43
605.80
384.31
569.70
697.37
539.99
572.15
403.47
308.46
330.91
411.04
364.94
(255.99)
317.76
396.23
363.92
95?
jf *J n
Confidence

Lower

367.22
420.45
366.68
253.88
188.87
570.76
424.93
'268.68
369.65
484.15
375.48
"400.67
295.22
213.67
230.45
285.77
253.12
(177.74)
235.77
273.55
238.23

Limits

Upper

542.74
631.14
547.07
379.50
279.06
831.26
623.29
395.41
589.26
718.05
555.79
588.69
413.64
317.43
340.60
423.10
375.58
(263.54)
325.49
408.10
376.21

Std. Error
xlOO
Mean

10.26
9.67
9.48
9.47
10.47
7.06
14.60
12.52
11.14
9.07
12.21
10.18
10.67
11.67
11.06
10.41
12.02
(12.90)
7.75
12.10
13.73
45
SAMPLE
73
74
75
76
77
90
91
86
ADL
661
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
IITRI
Ontario
447.00

300.94
352.04
499.68
(379.08)
(159.61)
670.02
442.89
(284.52)
376.80

212.36
254.38
382.71
(247.40)
( 79.81)
533.74
332.74
(240.92)
527.03

414.50
474.69
642.76
(556.64)
(287.30)
832.41
578.03
(334.04)
364.52

197.60
239.62
363.40
(227.45)
( 67.83)
509.90
314.57
(233.18)
542.74

437.22
499.68
671.16
(592.56)
(315.23)
864.21
605.29
(343.84)
11.96

23.50
21.84
20.52
(24.47)
(42.37)
14.07
17.82
(15.47)
Numbers in brackets are considered tentative,  since the data did  not conform to  Poisson
distribution or when the test for conformity could not. be applied.
                                      116

-------
5
(U
o
ca

*J

m
«
850



800




750




700




650




600




550



500




450




400




350




300



250




200




150
             Sample 154
                                tll
          1414243   2    3    456789 212223242526     31   18 19   45



                                    Data Set Number




   Figure 14.   90%  confidence intervals (inner) and 95% confidence intervals

                on the mean fiber number concentration.
                                       117

-------
                                                            Table 42
                                     SUMMARY OF  ROUND-ROBIN TEST RESULTS ON AIR SAMPLE 154
oo
......
0) 1 j 2 ; 3
o 1 Number
a ; Concent ration
a Data, 1 of All
a" Set i Fibers,
Code) Filter! 106/m3
[
I 4 154-2 434.8
1, 5 154-8 j 297.2
1 6 154-6 i 429.3
!• 7 154-3 | 547.0
1 8 154-1-A1 432.8
1 9 154-1-B 436.5
2 21 154-8 328.4
2 22 154-4 230.3
2 23 :154-5-A 268.3
2 24 '154-5-B 329.6
2 25 , 154-5-C 289.5
2 26 154-5-D 199.8
3 1 154-8 421.1
3 41 154-8-A 486.2
4 42 154-8-B 439.1
4 43 154-8-C 293.3
5+6 31 154-7 266.2
7 45 :i54-4-A 447.1
8 46A 154-4-B 37. 1
8 46B 154-4-B 55.1
8 47A 154-4 24.23
8 47B 154-4 16.15
; ' (ashed)
9 2-1 154-6A 209.2
9 2-2 154-6-B 215.5
10 3-1 154-3-A 623.5
10- 3-2 154-3-B 570.5
IV 18 154-2-A 310.9
11 19 154-2-B 274.4
11 	 L.., 	 — ..L
" 	 I
4 L 5
Size Distribution of

Mean
Length,
pm

1.061
0.780
0.838
0,770
0.714
0.894
0.995
1.385
0.943
0.934
1.062 i
0.987 ,
1.236 :
1.151
0.810 ,
0.888
1.384 ~*
0.873
1.352 '
1 .096
.209
.177

.739
.682
.104
.025
.032
.310 ,

Mean
	 ,
6
All Fibers

Mean
Diameter, ! Volume,
pm 10~15 cm3
1
0.067
0.059
0.067
0.057
0.055
0.061
0.067
0.077 ;
0.060
0.070
0.067
0.072
0.042
0.049
0.049
0.046
0.053
0.060 _^
0.053
0.044 ^
0.076
0.061

0.064
0.068
0.044
0.052
0.046
0.040
4.301
2.161
3.472
2.284
2.297
3.117
4.778
7.520
3.320
5.557
4.243
5.966
1.638
2.045
1.945
2.020
3.995 ^
3.595
4.673
2.043
40.33
4.19

6.44
0.002
3.590
3.822
3. 179
5.613
	 ....i 	 i 	 _..J

7
Volume
Concentration
of All
Fibers,
10~s c.m3/m3

1870.5
642.2
1490.5
- 1249.3
994.1
1360.6
1569.1
1729.6
890.7
1831.6
1228.3
1192.0
689.8
994.3
885.4

8
Number
Concentration
of
Chrysotile,

296.1
222.9
369.8
421.6
284.3
268.6
108.2
52.2
103.6
136.5
141.8
92.0
412.6
486.2
439.1
592.5 145.1
1063.5 I 140.8
1607.3
173.4
112.6
977.2
67.7
•
1347.2
1724.4
2238.4
2180.5
988.3
1540.2
355.1*





170.6
180.7
292.4
242.8
126.4
36.7
	 	

9

10
Size Distribution of

Mean
Length,
pm

1.316
0.846
0.912
0.874
0.876
1.064
1.318
2.017
1.091
1.161
1.291
1.035
1.251
1.151
0.810

Mean
Diameter,
pm

0.076
0.063
0.069
0.062
0.063
0.072
0.081
0.108
0.074
0.083
0.078
0.091
0.042
0.049
0.049
1.067 0.055
1.569 0.064
0.953 0.060





1.879 n
1.697
1.658
1.794
^ 1.298 ~*
1.602
„ —

•



0.069
0.070
0.068
0.086
0.056
0.038


' 11
Chrysotile

Mean
Vo 1 ume ,
ID'15 cm3

5.769
2.574
3.912
2.742
3.162
4.414
9.103
18.978
5.667
10.096
6.130
8.762
' 1.662
2.045
1.948
3.207
6.174
' 3.890





7.445
7.932
7.210
8.428
3.011
1.718
L 	
	
12
Chrysotile
Mass
Concent rat ion
in Air,
Pg/m3
,
4.442
1.492
3.761
3.006
2.391
3.083
2.561
2.570
1.526
3.584
2.260
2.097
1.783
2.585
2.224
1.210
! 2.270
r 3.591

_,

'''

3.303
3.726
5.482
5.320
0.989
0.164
1
        * Morphology alone.

-------
                                 Table 43




SUMMARY OF ROUND-ROBIN TEST RESULTS ON FIELD SAMPLE 661 (ALL SAMPLES ASHED)

-------
                                          Table 44




SUMMARY OF ROUND-ROBIN TEST RESULTS ON FIELD SAMPLE 661 (ALL SAMPLES ANALYZED WITHOUT ASHING)
Operator Code
1
1
2
5
5
6
4
4
10
1
Data
Set
Code
71
72
80
83A
83B
84
53
54 1
50
2
Filter
661-4*
661-4*
661-4*
661-7*
661-7*
661-7*
661-1*
661-1*
661-3*
3 rrr ,
i i
Number
Concentration
of All
Fibers,
106/m3
79.7
78.0
21.4
71.4
53.14
53.1
23.6
33.2
43.2
6
J
Size Distribution of All Fibers
Mean
Length,
Um
3.067
.1.490
2.916
1.728
2.197
2.100
3.519
2.284
1.551
Mean
Diameter,
pm
0.167
0.134
0.178
0.138
0.119
0.091
0.280
0.151
0.109
Mean
Volume,
10- 1S cm3
293.0
53.43
124.87
58.07
95.61
31.90
1781.0
82.55
53.05
7
Volume
Concentration
of All
Fibers,
10~9 cm3/m3
23352.0
4167.5
2672.0
4146.2
5080.7
1693.9
42031.6
2740.7
2291.8
8
Number
Concentration
of
Chrysotile,
106/m3
34.0
47.3
9.3
36.53
18.27
23.3
18,6
27.6
11.2
9
10
n
Size Distribution of Chrysotile
Mean
Length,
\im
4.853
1.589
3.719
2.614
4.227
3.064
3.713
3.361
2.25
Mean
Diameter,
jam
0.171
0.131
0.145
0.170
0.163
0.098
0.313
0.151
0.120
Mean
Volume
10-15 cm3
328.1
63.03
90.32
83.54
218.5
48.53
2203.0
81.53
62 .'97
12
Chrysotile
Mass
Concentration
in Air,
Ug/ra3
29.035
7.755
2.193
7.935
10.37
2.933 j
106.7
5*483 __^
1-827

-------
INTERLABORATORY COMPARISONS
     A direct and simple statistical method is follwed here for comparing
transmission electron microscope estimates for the two air samples examined in
the round-robin test.
     Data from the different laboratories were considered in three types of
comparisons.
     1.   Data for the laboratory air sample (unashed) as summarized in
          Table 42
     2.   Data for the field air sample with ashing as summarized in Table 43
          (ashed only)
     3.   Data for the field air sample without ashing presented in Table 44
     In each case, estimates of the following four parameters can be compared:
                                                 6  *?
     1.   Number concentrations of all fibers, 10 /m
                                                 —9   3  3
     2.   Volume concentrations of all fibers, 10   cm /m
                                                        6  3
     3.   Number concentrations of chrysotile fibers, 10 /m
                                                        3
     4.   Mass concentrations of chrysotile fibers, ugM
     For each of these parameters, sample means and standard deviations were
computed for each operator.  Confidence intervals about the mean at the 95%
level were calculated and graphed for comparison with the overall mean for each
case.  These are listed in Tables 45, 46, and 47.  The quantities listed in each
table are as follows:
     Operator Code - 1 to 11
           n       - Number of observations (or grids examined)
      t (y, n-1)   - t-value at 95% confidence (a = 0.05) and n-1 degrees of
                     freedom
           s       - Standard deviation of the observed values
          SEm      - Standard error of the mean value
         t'SEm     - Interval for obtaining 95% confidence limits
           x       - Mean value
         Lower     - Lower limit at 95% confidence, i.e., x - f(SEm)
         Upper     - Upper limit at 95% confidence, i.e., x - f(SEm)
                                       121

-------
                                                           Table 45


       95%  CONFIDENCE  INTERVALS ON  THE MEAN ESTIMATES FOR INDIVIDUAL OPERATORS IN AIR SAMPLE 154 (SEE TABLE  42)
Si
to
"T 	 T"^~
^Operator Code' '• j
i :
|«i '6
E
1
2
,
6

t (|, n-1) 2.571; 2.571
— 	 — — j 	 '— 4-— -.
1
; Concentration] s 79.24
of All
Fibers SEm* 32-35
,(106/ra3) t-SEm 83.2
x 429.6
1 lower 346.4
upper 512.8
j
Volume s '. 421.33
Concentration' _
/IA~ 9 3/ 3\ SEm . j 172.01
V ^- / Hi /
! if SEm i 442.2
! |x .1267.8
J
lower ; 825.6
'upper 1710.0
j i
i
Concentration s 72.36
of Chrysotile s&n 2g ^
f SEm 75.95

x 310.6
lower 234.6
.
upper ' 386.5
i
j
52.42

i 21.40
55.0
I 274.3
219.3
329.3
362.04
147.80
c
380.0
1406.9

: 1026. 9
!l786.9

32.60
; 13.31
34.2
^
i 105.7
7.15

139.9


Chrysotile is 1.030) 0.682
"ass „. isEm 0.420
Concentration
(Mg/m1) in fSEm .1.081
Alr x 3.029
! lower 1 . 948
upper 4.110
1 	
0.278
0.716
2,433
1.717
3.149

1 1
I
\

2

12.706
46.03

32.55
413.6
, 453.6
40.0
1 867.2
215.31
152.25
i
1934.5
842.0

'Negative
2776.5

52.04
36.80
467.5

449,4
Negative

916.9


0.567
0.401
5.094
2.184
Negative
7.278


2

|
1
1 5&6

i 1
i
12.706,
103.10

72.90
926.3
366.2
Negative
1292.5
185.90
131.45

1670.2
724.0

Negative
2394.2

207.89
147.00
1867.8

292.1
ttegat i ve

2159.9


0.717
0.507
6.442
1.717
legatlve
8,159
/
i --.-
1

'.
f T" "]
; 1
7 j 8 ' 9

I 2-2
^
12.706 12.706
16.76 4.45

H.85 3.15
, 150.6 40.0
: 266.2 447.1 31.2 > 212.4
—
Negative 172.4
' — -- 181.8 252.4
i
197.21 266.72
i — 139.45 188.60

! -- — 1771.8 2396.3
1063.5 1067.3 292.6 1535.8
' J
i — ' — [Negative Negative
— ' — 2064.4 3932.1
j (
7.14
; ! — 5.05
64.1
1
140.8
355.1 — 175.6
' — , — — 111.5
; I

t
- , ,,
• — . 239.7


—

,
' 	
2,260
—
—

— - 0.299
— ' | ., 0.211
— ! -- ; 2.686
I
i 10
i
! 2
1
': 12.706

11

2

12.706
1
' 37.48 25.81'

26.50

18.25
: 336.7 231.9 ,
597.0 292.6
260.3 60.7
I
933.7 i 524.5
: 40.94
390.25
28.95 275.95


367.8 3506.2 ,
2209.4 i 1264. 2

.1841.6 Negative,
2577.2 !4770.4
! 1
!
: 35.07 63.43
: 24.80 44.85
i 315.1 569.9

267.6 i 81.6 '
Negative Negative;
' '
j 582.7 ' 651.6 ;
'. 1
AU 1
Operators
Combined

26

2.060
143.98

28.24
58.2
332.4
274.2
390.6
526.29
103.21

212.6
1248.3

1035.7
1460.9

131.01
26.74
55.3

230.2
174.9

285.5

f
0.115 0.583
0.081 0.412J
1.033) 5.238
3.591 — I' 3.515J 5.401
• 0.829
6.201
- .1
4,368
0.577
Negative
6,434 5.815

1
1.291
0.264
0.545
2.725
2.180
3.270
J
               * SEm stands for standard error of the mean.

-------
                                                                     Table 46
rO
                95%  CONFIDENCE INTERVALS ON THE MEAN ESTIMATES FOR INDIVIDUAL OPERATORS  IN FIELD  AIR SAMPLE  661
                                                     (SEE TABLE 43)  (Ashed Samples  Only)
! 1 f — r — ] 	 •
1 i ; •

Operator Code; | 1
1 ' j 	 '
	 2 	

•n j 9 2
t (|, n-l)i 2.306' 12.706
!
; Concentration s | 159.59 11.10
of All ;
Tibell SE°>* 53.20 ! 7.85
. (lOVm3) fSEm j 122.7 i 99.7
x 347.4 84.4
'lower ' 224.7 | Negative
'upper 470.1 184.1
i
Volume 's i 12260. 61 1899.43
Concentration. ; ,„„, „-, ; , .,,, .„
,,n-
-------
                                         Table 47
  95% CONFIDENCE INTERVALS ON THE MEAN ESTIMATES FOR INDIVIDUAL OPERATORS IN FIELD AIR
                     SAMPLE 661 (SEE TABLE 44) (Unashed Samples  Only)


Operator Code


Concentration
of All
Fibers
(106/m3)


Volume
Concent rat ion
(10-9 cmVm3)



Concentration
of Chrysotile
(106/m9)



Mass
Concentration
Chrysotile
In Air
(Ug/ta3)




n
t 
-------
     For some operators, there is only one observation.  In such a situation,
only the value is plotted, but no estimate for standard error is obtainable and
the confidence interval is undetermined.  These are shown as the point values
with no confidence interval, where it should be noted that this represents a
confidence interval that is indefinite.
GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF RESULTS
     These results are graphed in Figures 15 (a, b, c, and d), 16 (a, b, c, and
d), and 17 (a, b, c, and d) for the observed parameters and in cases 1, 2, and
3 previously mentioned.
     When the computed lower limit is negative, the confidence interval is
truncated at zero.  This suggests that La-transformation should be used to avoid
non-positive values, in better agreement with the physical situation.
     The overall mean in each case has been plotted as dashed lines to facilitate
direct comparison with estimates of individual operators.  Laboratories and
operators whose confidence intervals overlap the overall averages can be con-
sidered in good agreement.  Some operators have narrower confidence intervals
due to a larger number of replications.
     The .results for Tables 43 and 44 (field air sample) showed greater varia-
tions than that in laboratory sample, and thus the change in scale for the plots
should be noted.
ACCURACY AND PRECISION OF ESTIMATES
Accuracy of TEM Chrysotile Mass Estimates
     As described earlier, it is impossible to obtain complete characterization
of an asbestos sample by some method independent of electron microscopy=  At the
most, only, the chrysotile mass estimate may be obtained by an independent method.
                                                                                 - '*V
Of the several approaches tried, only high-precision X-ray fluorescence spec-
trometry appeared useful [65].  The overall chrysotile mass estimates by the
electron microscope method on the two round-robin tests are compared below with
those by X-ray fluorescence analysis for magnesium content.
                                        125

-------
Number
Concentration of
All Fibers (106/m3)
(a)
H-1 M
*•  OO O N>
O O O O O
O Q O O O
200
0

5000
§
3^ 4000
ume
§"B ^ 3000
U U .O
C ^
u o 2000
•3 1000
0

Number
Concentration of
Chrysotile (106/m3)
(c)
Ml-1 NJ NJ
W O Ul O U1
O O O O C
OOP O O
0

g • 8.000
•H )->
4J -H
Q> BJ <£
MWB 6-°°°
*J C -H ^N
O 4) T3
>, erT ^ 4.000
W> 0 E
J= O ~-
O 60
m
'- I
1
1 1
i 2 :
4
I- J
- r i .
1 2
" i :

1 2
•


3 4


3 A


3 4

-•
i i 1 i i i
5&6 7 8 9 10 1
_ T I
1 1
i 566 7 8 9 10 1

T i ~~? 1
t 5&6 7 8 9 10 1
n -

i
L All Operators
T
"I
1
1 All Operators
f ,
1 T
1 All Operators
X-ray
Flour escence
	 T- /
Figure 15.  95% confidence intervals about the means in laboratory air
            sample 154 (see Tables 42 and 45).
                                   126

-------
1500
^ 1250
o°o 1000
O r-4
U 1-1 x^

§OOO
O O O
4J -H
te  .
: f
. I. 4 .

^
• i ,
| - | { *
12 3456 89 11 All Operators
2
p
! T , I


77 ;

p


10
X— Tinv
Fluorescence
B

* ,
                                                   11
                                              All Operators
Figure 16.
95% confidence intervals about  the means in field air sample 661
(see Tables 43 and 46), ashed samples only.
                                    127

-------
ro
°^ 100
C3 O
O i-l
VH i-l ^-I
(U 4J s~* _c
.0 ea co nj 75
S I* |i ^^^
3 u 01
z § 3 50
U E*4
e
0 rH
" < 25
0

c
o
•H
2^g
«j e x-s
0 CJ J3
tf \^^
oT 30,000
| S 20,000
=i 10,000
o

Number
mcentration of
rysotile (106/itt3
(c)
S , 8 .
> o o
0 £ °
0
o
H tJ
4J -rl
0) 41 •<
Sd c 60.0
§S"
-------
                          Electron Microscope Estimate       X-ray Fluorescence
                                 Chrysotile Mass               Chrysotile Mass
                              Concentration in Air          Concentration in Air
     Air Sample           	yg/m3	      	yg/m3	
Lab Sample 154                        2.725                         2.452
Field Sample 661                      15.396                        57.919
(ashed & unashed)
Field Sample 661                      13.751                        57.919
(ashed samples only)
     As expected, the agreement is good for the laboratory air sample 154, but
poor for the field air sample.  Direct comparison of results on field sample is
inappropriate because XRF measures all magnesium in Chrysotile, non-chrysotile,
and even non-fibrous minerals present.  For the laboratory air sample, where
such interferences are avoided, the EM method is in good agreement with the
XRF method.  These estimates from X-ray fluorescence method are also included in
Figures 15d, 16d, and 17d for direct comparison with estimates of individual TEM
operators.
Precision of TEM Estimates in Laboratory Air Sample
     One way of comparing precision of individual operators is illustrated in
Table 48.  Here, the ratio of the standard error to the mean value is expressed
as a percentage and used as a measure of precision.  Smaller value of this ratio
signifies better precision.
     From Table 48 the precision appears very good (less than 10%) for operators
1, 2, 3, 9, 10, and 11 for number concentrations of all fibers (see column 5).
The precision for operator 11 is poor (55% and 71%) for number concentrations
and mass concentrations of Chrysotile respectively (see columns 8 and 11).  In
chrysotile fiber number concentration estimate, operator 11 is the lowest (,81.55)
and operator 3 the highest (449.4).  The mean value of the estimate for all
                       6         3
operators is 230.0 x 10  fibers/m .  In chrysotile mass concentration estimate,
operator 11 is the lowest (0.58) and operator 10 the highest (5.4).  The mean
                                                    3
value of the estimate for all operators is 2.72 yg/m .
                                       129

-------
                                                  Table 48
                 PRECISION OF FIBER  CONCENTRATION ESTIMATES ON LABORATORY  AIR SAMPLE 154
1
Operator
Code
1
2
3
4
5&6
7
8
8*
9
10
11
2
No.
of
Tests
6
6
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
All Fibers
Number Concentration
10 6 Fiber s /m3
Mean
429.6
274.26
453.65
266.20
266.2
447.1
43.1
19.4
212.35
597.0
292.65
Std.
Error
32.35
21.42
32.55
72.90
—
—
—
—
3.15
26.50
18.25
Std. Error ,_0
Mean
7.53
7.81
7.18
19.91
—
—
—
—
1.48
4.44
6.24
6
7
8
Chrysotile Fibers
Number Concentration
106 Flbers/m3
Mean
310.55
105.72
449.4
292.1
140.8
355.1
—
—
175.65
267.6
81.55
Std.
Error
29.54
13.31
36.80
147.00
—
—
—
—
5.05
24.80
44.85
Std. Error ,nn
Mean
9.51
12.59
8.19
50.32
— T
	
	
—
2.88
9.27
55,00
9 | 10
11
Chrysotile Fibers
Mass Concentration
yg/*3
Mean
3.029
2.433
2.184
1.717
2.260
3.591
—
—
3.515
5.401
0.577
Std.
Error
0.420
0.278
0.401
0.507
--
—
—
—
0.211
0.081
0.412
Std. .Error ...
Mean Kl°°
13.88
11.44
18.36
29.53
—
—
--
—
6.02
1.50
71.49
12
13
14
Percentage of Fibers
Identified by SAED
Mean
72.59
39.30
99.00
76.33
52.66
—
—
—
82.70
55.19
27.01
Std.
Error
3.489
3.953
1.000
23.670
—
—
—
~
1.140
6.515
13,630
Std. Error .
Mean
4.81
10.06
1.01
31.00
—
—
—
~
1.38
11.81
50.47
* Ashed and reconstituted.

-------
Precision of TEM Estimates in Field Air Sample
     Precision as measured by the ratio of standard error to the mean value,
expressed as a percentage, on field sample is summarized in Tables 49 and 50.
     The precision for chrysotile fiber number concentration in the ashed
samples varies from 5.69 to 43  (see column 8 in Table 49), and for chrysotile
mass concentration varies from  14.20 to 94.5 (see column 11 in Table 49).
     The precision for chrysotile fiber number concentration in unashed samples
varies from 16.36 to 33.32 (see column 8 in Table 50), and for chrysotile mass
concentration varies from 13.33 to 90.24 (see column 11 in Table 50).
Comparison of Precision in Round-Robin Samples
     Table 51 lists the average precision value and its standard deviation for
the laboratory sample and the field sample.
     It is evident that the mean precision for chrysotile fiber number concen-
tration is almost the same for  the laboratory sample and the field sample, ashed
as well as unashed.  However, the mean precision for chrysotile mass concentra-
tion is much better for the laboratory sample (21.74) than that for field sample
(44.17 for ashed and 53.81 for  unashed).  In general, there is no difference in
mean values of precision between ashed and unashed field samples.
Ashed Field Sample - (See Table 49)
     In chrysotile fiber number concentration, operator 4 is the lowest (12.07)
and operator 5 is the highest (238.5).  The mean for all operators is
        6         o
108 x 10  fibers/m .  In chrysotile mass concentration, operator 8 is the
lowest (1.01) and operator 6 is the highest (39.21).  The mean for all opera-
tors is 13.85 ug/m .
Unashed Field Sample - (See Table 50)
     In the chrysotile fiber number concentration estimate, operator 2 is the
lowest (9.3) and operator 1 is  the highest (40.65).  The mean value of estimate
                                6         3
for all operators is 25.12 x 10 fibers/m .  In the chrysotile mass concentration
estimate, operator 10 is the lowest (1.83) and operator 4 is the highest  (56.09).
                                                              3
The mean value of the estimate  for all operators is 19.36 yg/m  .
     The spread in estimates is much higher in the ashed field  sample than in
the unashed field sample.
                                        131

-------
                                    Table 49




PRECISION OF FIBER CONCENTRATION ESTIMATES ON FIELD SAMPLE 661 (ALL SAMPLES ASHED)
1
Operator
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
11
2
No.
of
Tests
9
2
3
1
2
2
3
2
2
3
4
5
All Fibers
Number Concentration
106 Fibers/m3
Mean
347.3
84.4
29.3
16.3
494.7
463.8
153.3
204.4
260.1
Std.
Error
53.20
7.85
10.52
3.03
61.86
83.91
11.06
4.10
0.55
Std. Error
., xiuu
Mean
15.31
9.30
35.86
18.59
20.99
18.09
7.21
2.00
0.21
6
7
8
Chrysotile Fibers
Number Concentration
106 Fibers/m3
Mean
171.8
36.9
25.4
12.0
238.5
167.8
21.4
143.0
69.6
Std.
Error
28.37
4.30
10.94
2.58
53.0
8.85
6.68
8.15
11.75
Std. Error
_. xiuu
Mean
16.52
11.65
43.00
21.37
22.22
5.27
31.11
5.69
16.01
9
10
11
Chrysotile Fibers
Mass Concentration
UR/m3
Mean
13.22
4.39
30.15
13.36
27.75
39.21
1.01
2.75
5.90
Std.
Error
9.28
2.13
4.29
3.48
19.62
37.07
0.16
1.11
1.05
Std. Error
.. xiuu
Mean
70.20
48.51
14.23
26.05
70.70
94.54
15.34
40.36
17.79
12
13
14
Percentage of Fibers
Identified by SAED
Mean
66.094
50.385
95.873
87.57
49.66
37.06
15.77
69.96
28.24
Std.
Error
4.287
0.385
3.327
7.35
2.72
4.80
5.42
2.60
4.28
Std. Error
„ XIUU
Mean
6.48
0.76
3.47
8.39
5.48
12.95
34.38
3.72
18.71

-------
                                                           Table 50




                          PRECISION OF FIBER CONCENTRATION ESTIMATES ON FIELD SAMPLE  661  (UNASHED)
1
Operator
Code
1*
2*
4*
5*
6*
10*
2
No.
of
Tests
2
1
2
2
1
1
3
4
5 '
All Fibers
Number Concentration
106 Fibers/m3
Mean
78.85
21.4
28.4
62.3
53.1
43.2
Std.
Error
0.85
—
4.80
9.13
—
—
Std. Error 1QO
Mean xl°°
1.07
' —
16.90
14.65
—
—
6
7
8
Chrysotile Fibers
Number Concentration
1Q6 Fibers/m3
Mean
40.65
9.3
23.6
27.4
23.3
11.2
Std.
Error
6.65
—
4.50
9.13
—
—
Std. Error
„ • '- XXUU
Mean
16,36
—
19.07
33.32
— r
'
9
10
11
Chrysotile Fibers
Mass Concentration
yg/m3
Mean
18.39
2.75
56.09
9.15
2.93
1.83
Std.
Error
10.64
—
50.61
1,22
—
—
Std. Error
' XJ-UU
Mean
57.85
—
90.24
'13.33
—
—
12
13
14
Percentage of Fibers
Identified by SAED
Mean
70.515
47.58
95.48
45.89
43.75
47.31
Std.
Error
1.365
—
2.521
5.270
—
—
Std. Error
Mean KiUU
1.94
—
2.64
11.48
—
—
OJ
          * Unahsed direct transfer.

-------
                                    Table 51

             PRECISION OF DIFFERENT MEASUREMENTS IN THE TWO SAMPLES
All Fibers
Concentration
106/m3
Mean Value of
Precision*

Standard Deviation
of Precision
Laboratory Sample

     Unashed

       7.80


       5.78
   Field Sample

Ashed     Unashed

14.17      10.87
                                                               11.00
            8.56
Chrysotile
Fibers
106/m3

Chrysotile
Mass
Concent rat ion
yg/m3
i
Mean Value of
Precision**
Standard Deviation
of Precision
Mean Value of
Precision***

Standard Deviation
of Precision
21.11
21.79

21.74

23.71
-
19.20 22.92
12.11 9.11

44.17 53.81

28.95 38.61

*   Obtained from mean of the values listed in column 5 of Tables 48, 49, and
    50, respectively.

**  Obtained from mean of the values listed in column 8 of Tables 48, 49, and
    50, respectively.

*** Obtained from mean of the values listed in column 11 of Tables 48, 49, and
    50, respectively.
                                       134

-------
Explanation of Large Variation in Field Sample

     A large amount of this variation can be attributed to the presence of large

bundles or fiber aggregates occasionally found in this sample.  Quantitative

characterization of samples containing fiber bundles is difficult for the fol-
lowing reasons:

     1.   One cannot readily estimate the volume of an aggregate of fibers.   The
          current method of assigning some average length and width and assump-
          tion of a cylindrical shape results in a gross overestimate of the
          volume.

     2.   Fiber bundles generally have a large volume as compared with majority
          of individual fibers.  The presence of fiber bundles makes the fiber
          distribution bi-modal.  A few large bundles can account for a dispro-
          portionately large percentage of the total particulate volume and mass.

     Table 52 shows that substantially large fractions of total chrysotile mass
can be accounted for by a few chrysotile bundles.  The contribution of these
large bundles (i.e., larger than 1 ym3 in volume) to the chrysotile number con-
centration is relatively small.

Characterizing of Fiber Bundles

     At present there is no rational method for characterizing fiber bundles.
Grouping fiber bundle entities along with individual fibers leads to problems
as explained above.  Elimination of fiber bundles through high energy ultrasonic
treatment should not be undertaken because this may radically alter the initial
sample characteristics.  A complete disregard of the bundle entities, big and

small, would result in biasing the data.  In such cases, the following modifi-

cations are suggested:

     1.   Fiber bundles encountered should be reported as bundle entities with
          tentative average lengths and widths.

     2.   An arbitrary cut off, for example, bundles with volumes greater than
          a 1.0 ym3, should be used to separate the large bundles from the
          other fibers or small bundles.

     3.   When a few large bundles are encountered during the random scans, we
          recommend that after collecting data on 100-200 fibers, the sample be
          searched for large fiber bundles only collecting data on these large
          bundles (say 20 or 30) by scanning over large areas.  A somewhat lower
          magnification, say 10,OOOX or 5,OOOX, would be better for this.  This
          will enable one to obtain more representative distribution of fiber
          bundles and their number and volume concentrations in the initial
          sample.
                                       135

-------
                               Table 52

      EFFECT OF A FEW LARGE BUNDLES ON NUMBER CONCENTRATION AND
         MASS CONCENTRATION OF CHRYSOTILE IN FIELD SAMPLE 661
1



Data
Set
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
69
70
90
91
71*
72*
80*
81
82
83*
84*
86
51-1
51-2
51-3
52
53*
54*
50
48
49

2


Number Cone.
of all Chrys.
106/m3
116.9
158.9
278.2
139.7
49.9
123.7
137.1
41.2
32.6
223.7
318.0
34.0
47.3
9.3
238.5-
167.8
27.4
23.3
58.5
47.3
14.9
14.1
12.1
18.6
27.6
11.2
21.5
143.1

3
Number Cone, of
Chrys . Bundles
Greater than
1 ym3 in Size
106/m3










11.36 •
1.66







3.32
1.65
0.83
1.47
2.35





4
Actual Number
(counted) of
Chrys . Bundles
Greater than
1 ym3










1
2


2

1


4
2
1
8
10





5


Mass Cone.
of all Chrys.
yg/m3
3.029
5.035
10.740
3.411
4.211
2.957
0.746
2.850
8.204
1.760
80.629
29.035
7.755
2.757
22.62
9.91
9.153
2.933
6.949
21.58
33.83
35.01
13.5
106.7
5.483
1.827
1.014
2.749

6
.'
Mass Cone.
of Chrys.
Bundles
' Ug/ffl3
•>.

•';





':

63.8840
24.2986


15.5115

3.5265


15.8360
27.7713
34.3326
8.3418
100.6012

• -


s
* Unashed.
                                  136

-------
     4.   In the analysis of the particulate data, these large bundles should
          be treated separately from the other fibrous particulates and their
          number and mass reported separately.
EFFECT OF ASHING, ULTRASONIFICATION, AND RECONSTITUTION
     The field sample was studied with the inclusion of an ashing step by nine
operators (see Table 43).  The same sample was also studied without low tempera-
ture ashing, ultrasonification, and reconstitution by six operators (see
Table 44).
Effect of Ashing on Number Concentration
     One question most commonly asked is whether ashing, ultrasonification, and
reconstitution alter the initial sample.  To answer this question, one can com-
pare the number concentration estimates and mean fiber length and width dimen-
sions, in the unashed and ashed samples.
     Table 53 lists the data for number concentrations of all fibers in the ashed
samples (column 2), unashed samples (column 3), and the ratio of the concentra-
tion estimates for ashed samples to those for unashed samples.  Similar quanti-
ties for number concentration for chrysotile fibers are listed in columns 5, 6,
and 7, and for mass concentration of chrysotile in columns 8, 9, and 10.
     From columns 4 and 7 of Table 53, it is clear that the data from operators
1, 2, 5, and 6 distinctly show an appreciable increase in the reported number of
all fibers as well as the chrysotile fibers.  This is in contrast to data from
operator 4, who reports a net loss of fibers due to the ashing step.
     The increase in fiber number concentrations due to ashing step may have two
possible explanations:
     1.   Fiber breakage and breaking of bundles into fibrils,
     2.   A reduced interference by non-fibrous debris in the ashed sample, thus
          facilitating unhindered detection of fibers.
     If the number of fibers is increased due to breakage, it should decrease the
mean fiber length and mean fiber width  in the ashed and reconstituted sample.
However, this would also result if ashing led to reduced interference with the
detection of relatively short and thin fibers.
Effect of Ashing on Mean Length and Mean Diameter of Fibers
     The data on mean fiber length for all fibers and for chrysotile fibers are
summarized in Table 54.  The ratio of the mean fiber length  in the ashed sample
                                       137

-------
                                                                    Table 53
                         EFFECT  OF LOW  TEMPERATURE ASHING AND  RECONSTITUTION OF  FIBER CONCENTRATION ESTIMATES
OJ
CO
Operator
  Code
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    8
    9
   10
   11
                             All Fibers
                     Mean Number Concentration
                           106 Fibers/m3
Ashed
347.39
84.45
29.33
16.3
494.7
463.8
153.3
204.4
Unashed
78.85
21.4
.
28.4
62.3
53.1
—
—
Ratio
Ashed
Unashed
4.406
3,946
—
0.574
7.941
8.734
—
—
                              43.2
                                                                                8
                                                                                      10
     Chrysotile Fibers
 Mean Number Concentration
	10s Fibers/m3	
                    Ratio
                    Ashed
    Chrysotile Fibers
 Mean Mass Concentration
	yg/m3	
                  Ratio
                  Ashed
                    260.6
171.79    40.65     4.226
 36.9      9.3      3.968
 25.43
 12.1     23.6      0..513
238.5     27.4      8.704
167.8     23.3      7.202
 21.5
143.1
          11.2
 58.5
                                                  Ashed   Unashed   Unashed   Ashed   Unashed   Unashed
13.22    18.39     0.719
 5.52     2.756    2.006
30.15
13.50    56.09     0.241
22.62     9.15     2.472
 9.99     2.93     3.410
 1.01
 2.75
          1.83
 6.95
                                                                   11
                                                                                                          Remarks
  Does Ashing Increase the
  Number of Fibers Counted?
Definitely
Definitely
Not enough data
No, there is a definite  loss
Definitely
Definitely
Not enough data
Not enough data
Not enough data
Not enough data

-------
                                                            Table 54


                         EFFECT OF LOW  TEMPERATURE ASHING AND RECONSTITUTION OF MEAN FIBER DIMENSIONS
1
Operator
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
All Fibers - Characteristic Dimensions
Mean
Fiber Length
Um
Ashed
1.358
1.534
2.258
2.568
1.075
1.005
1.180
1.510
—
1.248
Unashed
2.279
2.915
~
2.902
1.928
2.100
--'
—
1.551
--
Ratio
Ashed
Unashed
0.60
0.53
—
0.88
0.56
0.48
--
—
—
—
Mean
Fiber Diameter
um
Ashed
0.082
0.106
0.198
0.206
0.079
0.082
0.077
0.055
—
0.071
Unashed
0.051
0.178
—
0.216
0.126
0.091
--
--
0.109
—
Ratio
Ashed
Unashed
0.54
0.60
—
0.95
0.63
0.90
--
__
—
—
8
9
10
11
12
13
Chrysotile Fibers - Characteristic Dimensions
Mean
Fiber Length
Um
Ashed
2.154
1.851
2.483
2.963
1.450
1.474
1.529
1.659
—
2.029
Unashed
3.221
3.719
— "
3.037
3.152
3.064
~
~
2.255
--
Ratio
Ashed
Unashed
0.67
0.50
~
0.98
0.46
0.48
--
—
—
-—
Mean
Fiber Diameter
Mm
Ashed
0.081
0.093
0.217
0.231
0.093
0.097
0.097
0.058
—
0.100
Unashed
0.151
0.145
—
0.232
0.168
0.098
—
—
0.120
— • ••
Ratio
Ashed
Unashed
0.54
0.64
~
1.00
0.55
0.99
—
—
—
-—
14
Does Ashing
Reduce
Observed Mean
Fiber Length?
Definitely
Definitely
Does Ashing
Reduce
Observed Mean
Fiber Diameter?
Definitely
Definitely
No Test Possible
N.S.*
Definitely
Definitely
N.S.
Definitely
N.S.
No Test Possible
No Test Possible
No Test Possible
No Test Possible
CO
VO
        * N.S. stands for not significant,

-------
to that in the unashed sample is listed in column 4 for all fibers,  and  in
column 10 for chrysotile fibers,  Similar quantities for mean fiber  diameter
are listed in column 7 for all fibers and in column 13 for chrysotile  fibers.
Data from operators 1, 2, 5, and 6 support the contention that more  fibers
are being generated in ashing step due to fiber breakage.  The data  from
operator 4 are inconclusive.
     The second explanation may also be simultaneously correct, but  it is diffi-
cult to verify.  Operators 2, 5, and 6 have reported increased chrysotile mass
estimates in ashed samples (see Table 53).  This seems to suggest  the  second
explanation.
     The reported low number concentration in ashing step by operator  4  may be
explained in two ways:
     1.   All fibers are not retained during the ashing and reconstltution.
     2.   Agglomeration occurs in the ashing step.
If the first explanation was valid, the mass concentration of chrysotile would
be reduced after ashing.  Table 53, column 10, does show that there  was  a sub-
stantial loss (75%) of chrysotile mass concentration.
     If the second explanation was valid, the mean fiber dimensions  should
increase.  Table 54 shows a slight decrease for mean fiber length  for all fibers
and practically no increase in mean length and mean diameter of chrysotile
fibers.  Hence, we may conclude that this is a real possibility of a true loss
of fibers because of the several transfer steps in the ashing and reconstitution
of samples.
     We had used the mean fiber length and mean width for assessing  the  effect
of ashing and sonification step.  An alternative method would be  to  consider
the entire length distribution.  Table 55 lists the length distribution  of
fibers for unashed and ashed samples for operator 2.  Tables 56,  57, and 58  show
the length distributions reported by operations 4, 5, and 6, respectively.
Frequencies have been expressed as percent frequencies for a direct  comparison
between ashed and unashed samples.
     In all four cases, it appears that the largest fibers reported in unashed
samples were  longer than those for the ashed sample.  Also, there were fewer
long fibers  in ashed sample as compared with the unashed  sample.
                                       140

-------
                    Table 55

LENGTH DISTRIBUTION IN ASHED AND UNASKED SAMPLES,
           DATA FROM OPERATOR NUMBER 2
Ashed
(Data Set 70)
% Frequency


1.85

1.85
1.85

1.85


. 1.85

1.85


3.70

7.41
3.70
1.85
3.70
1.85
7.41
1.85
1.85
1.85
5.55

3.70
11.11
20.37
5.55
1.85


Length, um
15.15
14.54
10.61
7.57
7.27
6.97
6.67
6.36
5.76
5.15
4.85
4.54
3.94
3.64
3.33
3.03
2.75
2.42
2.12
2.06
1.82
1.57
1.51
1.45
•(-Median-*- 1.33
1.21
1.09
0.97
0.91
0.73
0.61
0.48
0.36
Unashed
(Data Set 80)
% Frequency
1.92
1.92

3.84


1.92
1.92
1.92
1.92
5.77
1.92
3.84
7.69
1.92
1.92
7.69
«-MediaiH- 5.77
7.69

7.69

1..92


5.77

1.92
11.51
3.84
5.77
1.92

100.00                                      100.00
                        141

-------
                     Table 56

 LENGTH DISTRIBUTION IN ASHED AND UNASHED SAMPLES,
            DATA FROM OPERATOR NUMBER 4
Ashed
(Data Set 52)
% Frequency



1.08
1.08


2.17
1.08





2.17


1.08
2.17
1.08
1.08
9.78
6.52
3.26

10.86
1.08
4.35 -^-Median-*
5.43

20.65
5.43

1.08
2.17
9.78


1.08
1.08
3.25


Length , ym
31.0
27.0
19.5
16.0
14.0
11.5
11.0
10.0
9.0
8.0
7.75
7.50
7.00
6.00
5.00
4.75
4.50
4.25
4.00
3.75
3.50
3.00
2.50
2.25
2.17 -Hfedian-*
2.00
1.75
1.50
1.25
1.10
1.00
0.75
0.70
0.65
0,60
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
0.30
0.25
Unashed
(Data Set 53)
% Frequency
1.0
1.0
1.0


2.0
1.0
1.0

1.0
1.0
4.0
1.0
2.0

1.0
1.0
1.0
6.0

1.0
7.0
6.0
9.0
1.0
6.0
1.0
9.0
5.0
1.0
8.0
2.0
3.0

3.0
4.0
3.0
3.0
2.0


100.00
100.0
                        142

-------
                    Table 57

LENGTH DISTRIBUTION IN ASHED AND UNASKED SAMPLES,
           DATA FROM OPERATOR NUMBER 5
Ashed
(Data Set 81)
% Frequency

0.89



0.89

0.89


0.89

0.89
0.89
0.89

0.89
0.89
0.89

2.68

0.89
0.89
3.57
2.68
1.78
2.68
0.89
0.89
7.14
1.78
2.68
8.93 +Med
16.07
16.96
12.50
8.03
100.00


Length, ym
13.0
12.8
8.8
8.5
7.0
4.5
4.2
4.0
3.9
3.7
3.5
3.3
3.1
3.0
2.9
2.8
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.7
1.5
1.4 «-Median-»-
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
lian-* 0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3

Unashed
(Data Set 83)
% Frequency
1.33

1.33
1.33
1.33

1.33

1.33
1.33
2.67
1.33

1.33

2.67

2,67
5.33
1.33

5.33
5.33
1.33
1.33
5.33
4.00
5.33
1.33

6.67

4.00
5.33
12.00
5.33
5.33
4.00
100.00
                        143

-------
                     Table 58

 LENGTH DISTRIBUTION IN ASHED AND UNASHED SAMPLES,
            DATA FROM OPERATOR NUMBER 6
Ashed
(Data Set 82)
% Frequency


0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95

0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
1.90
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
2.86
2.86
9.52
7.62
8.57 ^Median-*-
10.47
5.71
19.05
11.43
3.81
0.95


Length, ym
0.30
9.00
6.00
4.50
4.30
4.00
3.10
3.00
2.80
2.50
2.30
2.10
2.00
1.90
1.80
1.70
1.60
1.50
1.40
1.30
1.20
1.10
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
Unashed
(Data Set 84)
% Frequency
3.12
3.12



9.38
3.12
12.50


3.12


6.25


3.12

+-Median-> 3.12


3.12
9.38
6.25
9.38
6.25
3.12
12.50
3.12


100.00                                     100.00
                        144

-------
     The tendency for the distribution to shift towards the small length after
ashing is quite evident.

     With the limited data from this study, we tentatively conclude that ashing

and sonification can significantly alter the measured sample characteristics.
The exact mechanism of this difference remains obscure.

     In this study of ashing and reconstitution, aerosol O.T. solution was used
for resuspending the ash.  There is a possibility that aerosol O.T. may have
contributed to some breakage of chrysotile fibers and obscured the effects of
actual ashing and ultrasonic treatment.  So, further work is needed to evaluate
the effects of ashing, dilution and reconstitution on the asbestos sample.

     A full-scale study is also needed to evaluate the effect of dilution,
without the ashing step.  This could be done by dissolving the initial filter

in a suitable solvent and then redepositing the solids onto a new polycarbon-
ate filter after appropriate dilution.

CONCLUSIONS

     This round-robin test was carried out with very little opportunity for

most of the participants to become familiar with the provisional procedure.
Much better results should be expected if such a test were repeated after

participants obtained more experience with the procedure.

     From the round-robin test, the following conclusions can be reached.

     1.   It is difficult to determine absolute accuracy of the electron
          microscope estimates.  The overall mean estimate for chrysotile
          mass concentration according to the electron microscope method is
          2.72 yg/m3 in the laboratory air sample.  This may be compared to a
          chrysotile concentration of 2.45 yg/m3 for the same sample as deter-
          mined independently by X-ray fluorescence speetrometric analysis of
          magnesium.  Thus, the EM estimate of chrysotile mass concentration
          differs by only 10% with that by the X-ray fluorescence method.

     2.   In laboratory sample, the ratio of spread between 95% confidence
          limits to the mean value was 0.48 for chrysotile fiber concentra-
          tion and about 0.40 for chrysotile mass concentration.

     3.   In the field air sample, studied with ashing, the ratio of the
          spread between 95% confidence limits to the mean value was about
          0.49 for chrysotile fiber concentration and about 1.57 for chryso-
          tile mass concentration.  In the same sample, studied without
          ashing, the corresponding values are 0.62 for chrysotile fiber
          concentration and about 2.34 for chrysotile mass concentration.
                                   145

-------
4.   Presence of a few large fibers or fiber bundles strongly influence the
     mass concentration estimates and mean values of length, width, and
     volume of fibers, but does not significantly affect the number concen-
     tration of fibers.

5.   The following modifications are suggested to mitigate the adverse
     effects of fiber aggregates on sample characterization.

     a.   Bundles or aggregates of fibers larger than 1 ym3 (as judged
          by mean length, diameter* and cylindrical shape assumption)
          should be counted as single entities.

     b.   Bundle entities should be treated separately and reported
          separately from other single fibers in the statistical analysis
          of fiber characteristics.

     c.   Representative data on bundles can be collected by scanning the
          sample at a lower magnification (e.g., 5,000 X).
6.   In any air sample, the precision of the estimates can be improved by
     studying at least three or four TEM grids.
                                146

-------
                                  REFERENCES


 1.   Thomson, J.G., R.O.C. Kaschula, and R.R. McDonald.  Asbestosis as a Modern
      Urban Hazard.  S. African Med. J., 37:  77, 1963.

 2.   Thomson, J.G.  Asbestos and the Urban Dweller.  Ann. N.Y, Acad. Sci.,
      132:  196, 1965.

 3.   Selikoff, I.J., J. Chrug and E.G. Hammond.  The Occurrence of Asbestosis
      Among Insulation Workers in the United States.  Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci.,
      132:  139, 1965.

 4.   Hourihane, D.O.  The Pathology of Mesotheliomata and Analysis of Their
      Association With Asbestos Exposure.  Thorax, 19:  268-278, 1964.

 5.   Owen, W.G.  Mesothelial Tumors and Exposure to Asbestos Dust.  Ann. N.Y.
      Acad. Sci., 132:  674, 1965.

 6.   Newhouse, M..L. and H. Thompson.  Mesothelioma of Pleura and Peritoneum
      Following Exposure to Asbestos in the London Area.  Brit. J. Ind. Med.,
      22:  261, 1965.

 7.   Whipple, H.E.  Biological Effects of Asbestos.  Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci.,
      132:  766, 1965.

 8.   Knox, J.F., R. S. Doll and I.D. Hill.  Cohort Analysis of Changes in Inci-
      dence of Bronchial Carcinoma in a Textile Factory.  Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci.,
      132:  526, 1965.

 9.   Harington, J.S., et. al.  Studies of the Mode of Action of Asbestos As a
      Carcinogen.  S. African Med. J.  41(32):  800-804, 1967.

10.   Tabershaw, I.R.  Asbestos as an Environmental Hazard.  J. Occup. Med.,
      16:  32, 1968.

11.   McDonald, A.D., et. al.  Epidemiology at Primary Malignant Mesothelial
      Tumors in Canada.  Cancer, 26(4):  914-919, 1970.

12.   Bader, M.E.,  et. al.  Pulmonary Function and Radiographic Changes in  598
      Workers with Varying Duration of Exposure to Asbestos.  Mt. Sinai J.  Med.
      37(4): 492-500, 1970.

13.   Gross, P., et. al.  The Pulmonary Response to Fibrous Dusts of Diverse
      Compositions.  Amer. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J.  31(2):  25-32,  1970.

14.   Reeves, A.L., et. al.  Experimental Asbestos Carcinogenesis»  Environ. Res.
      4(6):  495-511, 1971.

15.   Langer, A.M., I.J. Selikoff and A. Sastre.  Chrysotile Asbestos  in  the
      Lungs of Persons in New York City.  Arch. Environ. Health.,  22:   348-361,
      1971.

                                      147

-------
 16.  Selikoff, I.J., et. al.  Asbestos Air Pollution.  Arch. Environ. Health,
     25(1):   1-13, 1972.

 17.  Selikoff, I.J., W.J. Nicholson and A.M. Langer.  Carcinogenicity of Amosite
     Asbestos.  Arch. Environ. Health, 25(3):  183-188, 1972.

 18.  Gilson,  J.G., Health Hazards of Asbestos.  Composites, 3:  59,  1972.

 19.  Sherrill, R.  Asbestos - The Saver of Lives has a Deadly Side.  N.Y. Times
     Magazine, January 21, 12 pp., 1973.

 20.  Asbestos Health Question Perplexes Experts.  Chem. Eng. News.   51(50):  18,
     1973.

 21.  Timbrell, V.  Inhalation and Biological Effects of Asbestos.  In:  Assess-
     ment of  Airborne Particles.  Ed. T.T. Mercer et. al. Charles C. Thomas
     Publ., p. 429, 1972.

 22.  Stanton, M.F. and C. Wrench.  Mechanism of Mesothelioma Induction with
     Asbestos and Fiber Glass.  J. National Cancer Inst., 48:  797,  1972.

 23.  Report of the Advisory Committee on Asbestos Cancers to the Director of the
     International Agency for Research on Cancer.  In:  Biological Effects of
     Asbestos.  International Conference, Lyon, France, International Agency for
     Research on Cancer, IARC Sclent..Publ. 8:  341, 1973.    i

 24.  National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants - Asbestos, Beryl-
     lium, Mercury.  Fed. Register.  38(66):  pp. 8820-8850, 1973.

 25.  Wagner,  C.  Disputes on the Safety of Asbestos.  New Scientist, 61(888): 606,
     1974.

 26.  Wagner,  J.C.  Current Opinions on the Asbestos Cancer Problem.  Ann. Occup.
     Hyg., 15:  61-64, 1972.

 27.  Background Documentation onTEvaluation of Occupational Exposure to Airborne
     Asbestos.  Joint ACGIH-AIHA Aerosol Hazards Evaluation Committee.  Amer.
     Ind. Hyg. Assoc., 36(2): 91-103, 1975.

 28.  Keenan,  R.G. and J.R. Lynch.  Techniques for the Detection,  Identification
     and Analysis of Fibers.  Amer. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J., 31:587,  1970.

 29.  Mumpton, F.A.  Characterization of Chrysotile Asbestos and Other Members
    ^ of the Serpentine Group of Minerals.  Siemens Review, XLI, 75,  1974.

 30.  Kramer,  J.R., 0. Mudroch and S. Tihor.  Asbestos in the Environment.
     McMaster University, Report submitted to Research  Advisory Board,  Inter-
     national Joint Commission and Environment Canada,  1974.

31.  Richards, A.L.  Estimation of Trace Amounts of  Chrysotile Asbestos by X-ray
     Diffraction.  Anal. Chem. 44:  1872,  1972.

32.  Birks, L.S.  Quantitative Analysis of Airborne  Asbestos by X-ray Diffraction.
     Naval Res. Labs., Final Report, EPA-650/2-75-004,  1975.
                                       148

-------
33.  Crable, J.V., and M.J. Knott.  Application of X-ray Diffraction to the
     Determination of Chrysotile in Bulk and Settled Dust Samples.  Amer. Ind.
     Hyg. J., 27: 382-385, 1966

34.  Crable, J.V., and M.J. Knott. Quantitative X-ray Diffraction Analysis of
     Crocidolite and Amosite in Bulk or Settled Dust Samples.  Amer. Ind. Hyg.
     J., 27:449-453, 1966.

35.  Cook, P.M., J.B. Rubin, C.J. Maggiore, and W.J. Nicholson.  X-ray
     Diffraction and Electron Beam Analysis of Asbestiform Minerals in Lake
     Superior Waters.  Proc. Intern. Conf. on Environmental Sensing and
     Assessment, Pub. by IEEE, Piscataway, NJ, #$(2): 1-9, 1976.

36.  Schelz, J.P.  The Detection of Chrysotile Asbestos in Low Levels of Talc
     by Differential Thermal Analysis.  Termochem. Acta., 8: 197-203, 1974.

37.  Taylor, D.G., C.M. Nenadic, and J.V. Crable.  Infrared  Spectra for Mineral
     Identification.  Amer. Ind. Hyg. Assoc. J., 31: 100, 1970.

38.  Bagioni, R.P.  Separation of Chrysotile Asbestos from Minerals that Inter-
     fere with Its Infrared Analysis.  Environ. Sci. and Tech., 9: 262, 1965.

39.  Gadsden, J.A,, J. Parker, and W.L. Smith.  Determination of Chrysotile
     in Airbone Asbestos by an Infrared Spectrometric Technique.  Atmos. Env.,
     4: 667, 1970.

40.  Heffelfinger, R.E., C.W. Melton, D.L. Kiefer, and W.M. Henry.  Development
     of a Rapid Survey Method of Sampling and Analysis for Asbestos in Ambient
     Air.  Battelle Columbus Labs, Ohio, Final Report APTD-0965, EPA Contract
     No. CPA-22-69-110, 46 p., 1972.

41.  Richards, A.L.  Estimation of Submicrogram Quantities of Chrysotile
     Asbestos by Electron Microscopy.  Anal. Chem., 45: 809, 1973.

42.  Beckett, S.T.  The Evaluation of Airborne Asbestos Fibers Using a Scanning
     Electron Microscope.  Ann. Occ. Hyg., 16: 405, 1973.

43.  Pattnaik, A., and J.D. Meakin.  Development of Scanning Electron Microscopy
     for Measurement of Airborne Asbestos Concentrations.  Final Report,
     Franklin Inst. Res. Lab., Philadelphia, PA, EOA 650/2-75-209, 84 p.,
     National Tech. Inf. Service, Springfield, VA, 1975.

44.  Ruud, C.O., C.S. Barrett, P.A. Russell, and R.L. Clark.  Selected Area
     Electron Diffraction and Energy Dispersive X-ray Analysis for the Identi-
     fication of Asbestos Fibers, A Comparison.  Micron, 7: 115-132, 1976.

45.  Mueller, P.K., A.E. Alcoer, R.Y. Stanley, and G.R. Smith.  Asbestos Fiber
     Atlas.  U.S. EPA Publication No. EPA-650/2-75-036, National Tech. Inf.
     Service, Springfield, VA, 1975.

46.  Gerber, R.M., and R.C. Rossi.  Evaluation of Electron Microscopy for Process
     Control in the Asbestos Industry.  The Aerospace Corporation, Los Angeles,
     CA, Final Report, EPA-600/2-77-059, 55 p., National Tech. Inf. Service,
     Springfield, VA, 1975.
                                       149

-------
47.  Mlllette, J.R., and E.F. McFarren.  EDS of Waterborne Asbestos Fibers in
     TEM, SEM, and  STEM.  Proc. of IITRI Symposium on SET/1976/1, 451-460, 1976.

48.  Beamon, D.R.,  and D.M. File.  Quantitative Determination of Asbestos Fiber
     Concentrations.  Anal. Chem., 48(1): 101-110, 1976.

49.  Maggiore, C.J., and I.E. Rubin.  Optimization of an SEM X-ray Spectrometer
     System for the Identification and Characterization of Ultramicroscopic
   .  Particles.  Proc. of IITRI Symposium on SEM/1973, 129-136, 1973.

50.  Cochran, W.G., and G.M. Cox.  Experimental Designs.  Wiley, 1950.

51.  Youden, W.J.   The Collaborative Test.  Journal of the Association of
     Official Agricultural Chemists, 46(1): 55-62, 1963.

52.  Cramer, H.  Mathematical Methods of Statistics.  Princeton University
     Press, 1946.

53.  Fisher, R.A.   Statistical Methods for Research Workers.  Oliver and Boyd,
     10th Ed., 1946.

54.  Davies. O.L.  (Ed.).  The Design and Analysis of Industrial Experiments.
     Oliver and Boyd, 1954.

55.  Fisher, R.A.,  and F. Yates.  Statistical Tables.  Oliver and Boyd, 1948.

56.  Bartlett, M.S.  The Use of Transformations.  Biometrics, 3(1): 39-52, 1947.

57.  Herdan, G.  Small Particle Statistics.  Butterworth & Co., 2nd Ed., 1960.

58.  Daniel, C., F.S. Wood.  Fitting Equations to Data.  Wiley-Interscience,
     1971.

59.  Dixon, W.J. (Ed.).  BMD Biomedical Computer Programs.  University of
     California Press, 1977.

60.  Draper, N.R.,  and Smith, H.  Applied Regression Analysis.  Wiley, 1966.
                                                            :
61.  Tentative Method of Analysis for Suspended Particulate Matter in the Atmos-
     phere (High-Volume Method) 11101-01-70T.  Methods of Air Sampling and
     Analysis, Intersociety Committee, Amer. Public Health Assoc., 1015 18th St.,
     N.W., Washington, DC, 1972.

62.  Recommended Procedures for Sampling and Counting Asbestos Fibers; Joint
     AIHA-ACGIH Aerosol Hazards Evaluation Committee, Amer. Ind. Hygi. Assoc. J.,
     36(2): 83-90,  1975.

63.  Jaffe, M.A.  Handling and Washing Fragile Replicas. Proc. of EMSA, Toronto,,
     September 1948.  J. Appl. Phys., 19(12): 1189, 1948.

64.  Samudra,  A.V-, and C.F. Harwood.  Electron Microscope Measurement of
     Airborne Asbestos Concentrations - A Provisional Methodology Manual.  U.S.
     Environmental Protection Agency, Publication No. EPA-600/2-77-178, 55 p.,
     National Tech. Inf. Service, Springfield, VA, August 1977.
                                       150

-------
65.   Wagman, J.  Chemical Composition of Atmospheric Aerosol Pollutants by
     High Resolution X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometry.  In Colloid and Inter-
     face Science, Vol. II.  M. Kerker (Ed.), Academic Press, 1976.
                                     151

-------
                                 APPENDIX A
                     THE EXPERIMENT DESIGN FOR PHASE 1

     The design of  the fractional factorial experiment for studying  12 variables
 is  shown in  compact form in Table A-l, where Xx through X12 represent the  12
 variables, or  subprocedures, listed in Table A-2.  The indices  1, 2,  and  3  repre-
 sent the variable levels as defined in Table A-2.
     In order  to evaluate the  12 independent variables, the variable levels were
 orthogonally coded  as shown in Table A-2.  Each three-level variable has one
 linear and one quadratic component, denoted by L and Q respectively, while each
 two-level factor has one quadratic component.  The coding scheme shown in  Table A-3
 is  chosen to satisfy three conditions:
     1.   The  sum of linear components for each variable is zero^ (8  linear com-
          ponents) .                                             ;
     2.   The  sum of quadratic components for each variable is zero  (12  quadratic
          components).
     3.   The  sum of the cross products of each pair of components is zero (190
          pairs of  components).
     This is illustrated by considering the variable XI.
Level
1
2
3

Linear
Comp. Code
-1
1
_0
Total 0
Quadratic
Comp . Code
1
1
^2
Total 0
Cross Product
-1
1
_0
Total 0
Thus, it satisfies all the three conditions  specified above.   This coding scheme
ensures  the orthogonality, i.e., independence ,and  non-correlation of the variables
considered, and helps to bring out even relatively  small effects of the 12 controlled
factors.
                                     152

-------
        Table A-l




PHASE 1 EXPERIMENT DESIGN
Combination

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Factor
*l .,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
^
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
A3
o
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
*4
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
V
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
^6
1 ,
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
x7

3
1
2
1
.2
3
2
3
1
3
1
.2
1
2
3
2
3
1
3
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
^8
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
*g
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
3
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
1
2
2
3
1
1
2
3
-10
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
^•11
2
1
3
3 .
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
/\4 A
—12
1
3
2
2
1
3
3
2
1
2
1
3
3
2
1
1
3
2
3
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
3
            153

-------
             Table A-2


INDEPENDENT VARIABLES,  PHASE  1

                                   Levels and Codes
            Variable
INDEPENDENT VARIABLES OF FILTER  LOADING

X-,   Composition of Sample in
     Aerosol Chamber
                                         (1)  100% Chrysotile
                                         (2)   60% Chrysotile
                                             + 4035 Amphibole
                                         (3)   70% Chrysotile
                                             + 20% Amphibole
                                             •*• 10% Non-Asbestos Fiber
                                                  XiL=-l

                                                  Xjl= 1
X,Q= 1

XiQ= 1
                                                  XjL= 0  XjQ=-2
c on Filter (1) Light X2L=-1 X2Q= 1
(2) Medium. X2L= 0 X2Q=-2
(3) Heavy _ X2L= 1 X2Q= 1
X, Sampling Instrument- (1) High Volume •> X3Q=-2
J (2) Personal XjQ= 1
X,, Filter Type (1) Nuclepore X*Q=-2
4 (2) Millipore X,Q= 1
Xc Pore Size, nominal (1
(2
(3]
I 0.2 pm X5L=-1 X5Q= 1
1 0.4 \tm XSL= 0 X5Q=-2
I 0.8 um X5L- 1 X5Q= 1
INDEPENDENT VARIABLES OF TEM GRID PREPARATION
Xs FiHer Side (1]
; . <2<
Particle side down X6Q= 1
Particle side up X6Q=-2
X7 2.3 mm Portion location (1) Periphery X7L=-1 X7Q= 1
' (2) Mid-radius X7L= 0 X7Q=-2
(3) Center X7L= .1 X7Q= 1
XB Use of Carbon Coating (1
8 (2
XQ Transfer Method (1,
•|i!
INDEPENDENT VARIABLES OF TEM EXAMINATION
Yes X8Q=-2
No X«Q= 1
Soxhlet Extraction 1 (short) X9L=-1 X9Q= 1
Soxhlet Extraction^ (long) X9L= 1 X9Q= 1
Jaffe Method X9L= 0 X,Q=-2

Xln Magnification, nominal* (1) 5.000X (screen mag. 4.000X) Xi0L=-l X10Q= 1
u . ' (2) 10.000X (screen mag. 8.000X) X,0L= <3 X,0Q=-2
(3) 20,OOOX (screen mag. 16.000X) Xi0L= 1 X10Q= 1
Xn Grid Opening Location (1
11 (2
(3
X12 Choice of Fields (1
Periphery XML=-1 XnQ= 1
Mid-radius Xul-= 0 XuQ=-2
) Center XnL= 1 XnQ= 1
Random choice of small fields Xi2L=-l Xi2Q= 1
Small fields, consecutive Xt2L= 1 X12Qs 1
Entire grid opening as a field Xi2L= 0 Xi2Q=-2
*The actual magnification at the fluorescent  screen is somewhat smaller than the nominal or
 camera  magnification, depending upon the  design geometry of each transmission electron
 microscope.
                                           154

-------
                                                        Table A-3
                              VALUES  OF  CODED INDEPENDENT VARIABLES,  PHASE 1  COMBINATIONS
Cn
XI
Comb.
•; l
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
L
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Q
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
X2
L
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
0
0
0
1
1
1
Q
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
1
1
1
X3
X
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
X4--
Q
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
.,, 	 )
L
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
1
0
1
-1
0
1
-1
0
1
(5
~±
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
X6
Q
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1

L
1
-1
0
-1
0
1
0
1
-1
1
-1
0
-1
0
1
0
1
-1
1
-1
0
-1
0
1
0
1
-1
X7
TF
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
-'2
1
1
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
-2
1
1
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
-2
1
1
X8
X
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
1
1
1
-2
-2
1
1
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
. X9
L
-1
1
0
0
-1
1
1
0
-1
1
0
-1
-1
1
0
0
•-1
1
0
-1
1
1
0
-1
-1
1
0
JL
i
i
-2
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
-2
1
1
-2
1
1 .
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
X10
Xll
X1Z
TT T— D: T— P:
0
-1
1
0
-1
1
0
-1
1
1
0
-1
1
0
-1
1
0
-1
-1
1
0
-1
1
0
-1
1
0
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
1
1
-2
0
-1
1
1
0
-1
-1
1
0
0
-1
1
1
0
-1
-1
1
0
0
-1
1
1
0
-1
-1
1
0
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
-2
1
1
1 •
-2
1
1
1
-2
-1
0
1
1
-1
0
0
1
-1
1
-1
0
0
1
-1
-1
0
1
0
1
-1
-1
0
1
1
-1
0
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
-2
1
1
1
1
-2
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
-2
1
1
1
-2
1
1
1
-2

-------
                                              Table A-4

                            STATISTICS  OF FIBER CHARACTERISTICS BY SAMPLE
                                              SAMPLE 1
                        Total        Mean       S.D.       S.E.        Var.        Min.        Max.
            3
Volume  (ym)             0.382780   0.0026582   0.0047790  0.0003982  0.0000228   0.0000614   0.0359526
(over all  fibers)

LN Width  (Uffi)        -433.108917  -3.0077009   0.5166071  0.0430506  0.2668829  -3.6888795  -1.6739764
(over all  fibers)

LN Length.(ym)       -95.527122  -0.7405204   0.6529610  0.0574900  0.4263580  -2.0794415   0.8109303
(contained  fibers)

LN Ashed Ratio       291.630096   2.2606983   0.6369779  0.0560828  0.4057407   1.3862944   4.0943446
(contained  fibers)

LN Volume  (ym)3      -901.003296  -6.9845219   1.4403129  0.1268125  2.0745010  -9.6987667  -3.3255527
(contained  fibers)


The total number of  fibers observed =  144

The number of fibers contained  within  their  field =129

-------
                                  APPENDIX B
                             REGRESSION ANALYSIS

     The experimental  data  resulting  from execution of  the design presented can
 be best analyzed by multiple regression methods,  i.e.,  find values of the regres-
 sion coefficients of a model equation that provide the  best fit, taking account
 of the magnitude of the  experimental  error.  A stepwise fitting procedure will be
 applied making use of  the computer program BMD02R from  the BMD library of statis-
 tical programs  [59],
     The stepwise method of fitting is preferred  because it selects only those
 candidate terms for inclusion in  the  regression equation that contribute signif-
 icantly to the prediction of values of the dependent variable.  The regression
 coefficients enter into  the equation  as multipliers to  compute the values of the
 dependent variable on  the basis of values of the  significant independent variables
 and covariates.
     In the stepwise multiple regression  analysis, intermediate response equa-
 tions are obtained through  the insertion, at each step, of the candidate term
 that makes the greatest  contribution  to the reduction in the residual sum of
 squared deviations or, alternatively,  the deletion of a variable whose contribu-
 tion falls below a specific threshold significance level.  This contribution is
 measured by the F-value  (square of the t  value, which is the regression coeffic-
 ient divided by its standard error).   At  each step of computation, the regression
 coefficient and the F-value associated with each  variable in the equation are
 given, together with the potential F-value for each variable not in the equation.
 The threshold F-values for  inclusion  and  deletion of terms, set by the analyst,
 at  the 20% level determine at what point the fitting process terminates.  The can-
 didate variables need not be all  the  independent  variables and covariates together.
 These variables can be separated  into blocks to investigate the relationships
 among the independent variables and covariates separately as well as in combina-
 tion.
     In the stepwise fitting procedure it is often found that some  (perhaps many)
of the candidate regression coefficients  have estimated values that are not sig-
nificantly above the "noise level;" hence, those  terms  should be excluded from the
regression equation for  the sake  of simplicity and predictive accuracy.  The  sum
                                      157

-------
of squares and degrees of freedom associated with these excluded terms can, in
many instances, be pooled to refine the variance estimate.
     The final values of the regression coefficients are computed together with
their standard errors and levels of statistical significance (F or t values) .
For each observation, the value of e (difference between observed and predicted
value of the dependent variable) is computed as a check on possible out-liers in
the data.
     In the regression equations for each dependent variable, only those terms
were retained having coefficients significant at the 20% probability level.  That
is, a term was dropped if it was determined that its coefficient value could
occur by chance 20% or more of the time due merely to accidents of sampling.
     Table B-l gives the full information on regression equation 9 for dependent
variable Yq, the square root of the estimated fiber count per ml of air.  The
equation contains 14 terms, the other candidates having been dropped because of
their statistical non-significance.  The equation is of the form
               + B6(X6Q) -I- B7(XgQ) + Bg(X9L) + B^p) + BIO(XIQL)

               + Bn(X1()Q) + B12(XUQ) + B13(X12Q)                          [1]

Since 27 tests were run, there remain 13 degrees of freedom  (i.e., 27-14) for
estimating the magnitude of the residual variation.  The residual standard  dev-
                                                                   2
iation was calculated to be 1.9012.  The degree of determination, R  , was found
to be 96%, i.e., 96% of the variation in the values of Y_ is accounted  for  by
the independent variables in the equation.  For each term in the equation,  the
values found for the regression coefficients, B  through B „, are listed along
with their standard errors and variance ratios (which indicate their relative
significance).  The least-squares fit for equation Y~ was found to be
          Y9 = 12.300 + 0.7810^1.) + 0.489(X1Q) - 1.714(X2D + 0.426(X2Q)

               + 0.811(X3Q) + 1.001(X6Q) - 1.601(XgQ) - 1. 590(^1)

               - 1.796(XgQ) + 4.265(X1QL) + 0.821(X1QQ)

               + 0.936(XUQ) + 1.358(X12Q)                                  [2]
                                      158

-------
         Table B-l




PERFORMANCE EQUATION NO. 9
Dependent Variable:

Number of Tests:
Number of Terms in Equation:
Residual Degrees of Freedom:
Residual Standard Deviation:
2
Degree of Determination, R :


Independent Variable
Constant term
X0= '
Composition of sample
X.L (Coded -1 , 1, 0)
XJQ. (Coded 1, 1, -2)
Concentration on filter
X,L (Coded -1 , 0, 1)
X^Q (Coded 1, -2, 1)
Sampler type
X3Q. (Coded -2, 1)
Filter side
X6Q (Coded 1 , -2)
Carbon coating
X8Q (Coded -2, 1)
Transfer method
X-L (Coded -1, 1, 0)
X|Q, (Coded 1,1, -2)
Magnification
XinL (Coded -1, 0, 1)
XjgQ (Coded 1, -2, 1)
Grid opening location
X^Q (Coded 1, -2, 1)
Choice of fields
X12Q (Coded 1, 1, -2)
Yg = Square
fibers
27
14
13
1.9012
962
Regression
Coefficient
b

12.300

0.781
0.489

-1.714
0.426

0.811

1.001

-1.601

-1.590
-1.769
4.265
0.821

0.936

1-358
root (estimated
per cm3 of air)





Standard
Error
sb



0.448
0.259

0.448
0.259

0.259

0.259

0.259

0.448
0.259
0.448
0.259

0.259

0.259
no. of






Variance
Ratio
F



3.04
3.57

14.64
2.71

9.82

14.96

38.30

12.59
46.77
90.61
10.07

13.07

27.55
1 l-J.Jl.UII 111] I
                                                 +nro I iKrorw

-------
     Thus, given particular levels for each of the factors X-^ through X12, a
corresponding estimate for YQ may be found by using the appropriate coded values
for XL through XT_Q defined in Table A-2.  For example, for combination 1, the
     *.           1Z
estimated value for Y. is found in the following way.  Table A-l gives the levels
of the factors X  through X   used in combination 1, and for each of these, Table
A-2 shows the appropriate coded values of the variable XL through X.-Q-  Thus,
for combination ls the coded values of the terms involved in the equation for Y
are given by:
Variable
XIL
xlQ
x2L
X2Q
Coded
Value
-1
1
-1
1
Variable
X3Q
X6Q
X8<>

Coded
Value
1
1
1

Variable
X9L
X9Q
XIOL

Coded
Value
_j
1
0

Variable
X10Q
XUQ
X12Q

Coded
Value
-2
-2
1

so that the estimated value for Yq is found to be
          Y9 (combination 1) - 12.30 + 0.781(-1) + 0.489(1)
               -1.714C-1) + 0.426(1) + 0.811(1) + 1.001(1)
               - 1.601(1) - 1.590(-1) - 1.769(1) + 4.265(0)
               + Q.82K-2) + 0.936(-2) + 1.358(1) = 12.024
     Equation 2 can be rewritten, grouping together the terms associated with the
separate factors
 12.30 +  [0.781(X.L) + 0.489(X,Q]
                 1             1
+  [-1.714(X2L) '+ 0.426(X2Q)]

+  [0.811(X3Q)] + [1.001(X6Q)J

+  [-1.601(XgQ)]  +  [-1.590(XgL)  -  1.769(X9Q)]

+  [4.265(X1QL) + 0.821(X1QQ)]

+  [0.936(XUQ)]  +  [1.358(X12Q)]
                                                                           [3]
                                     160

-------
In this form Yg, is seen to equal  its mean value  (12.300) plus or minus the net
effect contributed by each factor  taken at its  specified level.  These net effects
are listed in Table A-2 for each level of each  factor.  For example, at level 2
of factor X1, that is, for a sample composition of  60% chrysotile and 40% amphibole,
since the coded values corresponding to this level  are given by X L = +1, X.Q = +1,
the corresponding net contribution factor X, at this level is found to be
          I0.78K+1) + 0.489(+1)]  - 1.270
The standard error of the net effect is found from  the standard error of each
term by the formula
          SE = /(STX^)2 +  (SnX.)2
                  L L       q q
where X^, X  are the coded values for  the appropriate .level of the linear and
quadratic components, respectively, and S  and S  the standard errors of the
linear and quadratic components, respectively.  For example, for level 2 of
factor X.
          SE = /(I x 0.488)2 + (1 x 0.259)2 = 0.518
In the case that the linear component  of some factor is missing, the corresponding
term is dropped from the formula and SE = /(S_X) ; similarly, if the quadractic
component is missing, SE = S_.
     The 80% confidence limits for each relative effect were found using student's
t with 13 degrees of freedom, t = 1.350.  Thus, for example, for level 2 of XI,
the lower limit of the 80% confidence  interval is found to be
          1.270 - (1.350 x 0.518) = 0.572
and the upper limit
          1.270 + (1.350 x 0.518) = 1.968
That is, with at least 80% certainty,  the net effect of choosing level 2 of XI
would be to raise the estimated mean value of Y_ by an amount lying in the 80%
confidence interval between 0.572 and  1.968.  The confidence limits for the
various net effects are given in Table B-2 and are presented graphically in
Figures 3 and 4 of the main report.
     A similar analysis is presented for Yj_  (the natural log of the estimated
concentration of the fibers in the atmosphere) in Tables  B-3 and B-4 and Figures  5
and 6 of the main report.  From Table  B-3 it  is seen that the number of terms in
the regression equation for Y-. was 11, leaving 16 degrees of freedom;  the resi-
dual standard deviation was 0.6683, and the degree of determination R   =  81%.
                                       161

-------
                                  Table B-2

EFFECTS OF EM PROCEDURAL FACTORS ON SQUARE ROOT OF ESTIMATED NUMBER OF FIBERS
                 PER CUBIC CENTIMETER OF AIR,  FROM EQUATION 9

xl
X2
X3
X6
X8
x9
xto
X11
XT2
Factor
Composition of
Sample
Concentration
on Filter
Sampler Type
Filter Side
Carbon Coating
Transfer Method
Magnification
Grid Opening
Location
Choice of
Fields
Level
100% Chrysotile
60% C + 40% Amphibole
70% C + 20% Amphibole
+ 10% Fiberglass
Light
Med i urn
Heavy
High volume
Personal
Particle side down
Particle side up
Yes
No
Soxhlet 1
Soxhlet 2
Jaffe
5,ooox
10,OOOX
20.000X
Per i phery
Mid-radius
Center
Random, small
Consecutive, small
Entire grid opening
Relative
Effect
-0.292
1-270
-0.978
2.140
-0.852
-1.288
-1.622
0.811
1.001
-2 . 002
3.202
-1 .601
-0.179
-3.359
3.538
-3.444
-1.642
5.086
0.936
-1.872
0.936
1.358
1.358
-2.716
Standard
Error
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.259
0.259
0.518
0.518
0.259
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.518
0.259
0.518
0.259
0.259
0.259
0.518
80% Confidence Limits
Lower
-0.990
0.572
-1.677
1.442
-1.551
-1.987
-2.321
0.461
0.651
-2.701
2.503
-1.951
-0.877
-4.057
2.839
-4.142
-2.341
4.388
0.586
-2.571
0.586
1.008
1.008
-3.415
Upper
0.406
1.968
-0.279
2.838
-0.153
-0.589
-0.923
1.161
1.351
-1.303
3.901
-1.251
0.519
-2.661
4.237
-2.746
-0.943
5.784
1.286
-1.173
1.286
1.708
1.708
-2.017
                                      162

-------
                         Table B-3


                PERFORMANCE EQUATION NO. 10
Dependent Variable:
Number of Tests:
Number of Terms in Equation:
Residual Degrees of Freedom:
Residual Standard Deviation:
2
Degree of Determination, R :

Independent Variable
Constant term
X0= '
Compos i t i on of samp 1 e
X^ (Coded -1, 1, 0)
Concentration on filter
X2L (Coded -1, 0, 1)
Filter type
X^Q (Coded -2, 1)
Pore size
X Q (Coded 1, -2, 1)
3 mm Portion Location
X?L (Coded -1, 0, 1)
Carbon coating
XgQ (Coded -2, 1)
Transfer method
XgQ (Coded 1, 1, -2)
Magnification
XinL (Coded -1, 0, 1)
X "0_ (Coded 1, -2, 1)
Y. = Log (estimated mass concen-
tration of fiber micrograms
per cubic meter)
27
11
16
0.6683
8U
Regression
Coefficient
b

0.286
0.331
-0.466
0.184
-0.121
-0.215
-0.351
-0.450
0.283
-0.159





Standard
Error
sb


0.158
0.158
0.091
0.091
0.158
0.091
0.091
0.158
0.091





Variance
Ratio
F


4.41
8.73
4.11
1.77
1.87
14.93
24.51
3.23
3-04
Choice of fields
  X10Q (Coded 1, 1, -2)        0.134         0.091         2.18
                             163

-------
The various coefficients of the equation are listed along with their standard
errors and variance ratios.
     Table B-4 then presents the net effects of the different levels of the
various factors on Y1f. together with their standard errors and 80% confidence
limits.  The confidence intervals are presented graphically in Figures 5 and 6
of the main report.
                                    164

-------
                               Table B-4

EFFECTS OF EM PROCEDURAL FACTORS ON NATURAL LOGARITHM OF ESTIMATED MASS
 CONCENTRATION OF FIBERS (MICROGRAMS PER CUBIC METER), FROM EQUATION 10

xl
x2
x4
X5
X7
X8
X9
X10
X12
Factor
Composition of
Sample
Concentration
on Filter
Filter Type
Pore Size
3 mm Position
Location
Carbon Coating
Transfer Method
Magnification
Choice of
Fields
Level
100% Chrysotile
60% C + 40% Amphibole
70$ C + 203 Amphibole
+ 10% Fiberglass
Light
Med i urn
Heavy
Nuclepore
Millipore
0.22 ym
0.^5 ym
0.80 ym
Periphery
Mid-radius
Center
Yes
No
Soxhlet 1
Soxhlet 2
Jaffe
5,OOOX
10,OOOX
20.000X
Random, small
Consecutive, small
Entire grid opening
Relative
Effect
-0.331
+0.331
0
+0.466
0
-0.466
-0.368
+0.184
-0.121
+0.242
-0.121
+0.215
0
-0.215
+0.702
-0.351
-0.450
-0.450
+0.900
-0.442
+0.318
+0.124
+0.134
+0.134
-0.268
Standard
Error
0.158
0.158
0.158
0.158
0.158
0.158
0.182
0.091
0.091
0.182
0.091
0.158
0.158
0.158
0.182
0.091
0.091
0.091
0.182
0.182
0.182
0.182
0.091
0.091
0.182
80% Confidence Limits
Lower
-0.542
0.120
-0.211
0.255
-0.211
-0.677
-0.611
0.062
-0.243
-0.001
-0.243
0.004
-0.211
-0.426
0.459
-0.473
-0.572
-0.572
0.657
-0.685
0.075
-0.119
0.012
0.012
-0.511
Upper
-0.120
0.542
0.211
0.677
0.211
-0.255
-0.125
0.306
0.001
0.485
0.001
0.426
0.211
-0.004
0.945
-Ov229
-0.328
-0.328
1.143
-0.199
0.561
0.367
0.256
0.256
-0.025
                                    165

-------
                                      APPENDIX C

                             POISSON DISTRIBUTION TESTS
LISTING OF COMPUTER PROGRAM POISSON-1 FOR CHECKING CONFORMITY WITH THE  POISSON
DISTRIBUTION

    C PROGRAM POISSONi TO COMPARE OBSERVED  AND CALCULATED  EVENT DISTRIBUTIONS
    C AND DETERMINE TMC GOODNESS OF FIT OF  THE POISSON  MODEL  TO THE DATA,
    C WRITTEN BY F C BOCK, IIT RESEARCH INSTITUTE,
           REAL M,ML
           DIMENSION VO(99),FOC99)»Fi(99),F2t99)»T£MPn2>
    C—NO J3 THE NUMBER OF PAIRS OF VALUES  OF VO  AND  FO TO BE READ  IN
C—Nt
C— »VO(
C— F0(
C--F1
P*-F2
109
til

tl5
US
    ur
           S THE NUMBER OF CELL FREQUENCIES TO  BE  CALCULATED*  FQR  0 TO  N}»1 EVENTS
           * 19 A SPECIFIED NUMBER OF EVENTS PER CELL*  I*1»,.,«NO
           ) IS THE OBSERVED NUMBER OF CELLS WITH  VOU)  EVENTS PER CELL
           S THE COMPLETE ARRAY OF OBSERVED CELL FREQUENCIES  INCLUDING  ZEROS
           S THE COMPLETE ARRAY OF CALCULATED CELL FREQUENCIES
           READ(5.1J1) NO, Nl, TEMP
           PORMAT(2I<|,l2Afc)
           «RITE(6*U3) TEMP
                          8TOP
           PO*MATCB
-------
125
127

128
       CHI2s99**2/F?(J)
       w»lTt(6tl?7) Jl»F1(J)tf-2(J)»D»CHI2
       rORMAT(lX»I6»Fll.',0»ri5.4i2F12,RKAT(/lx« 'TOTAL. OBSERVED CELLS »
         /1X»'TOTAL CALCULATED CELLS »
         /1X>'TOTAL OBSERVED EVENTS *
         /IXi'TOtAi. CALCULATED FVENTS »
  //tx» 'STATISTICS APPLYING TO NO, EVENTS PER CELL**/
         /1X»IHF.AN EVENTS PER CELL «
         /1X»'SUM OF SQUARED DEVIATIONS »    »F10.4
         /IXs'DEliRLES OF FRFEDOM a           iF10.4
         /Itlt 'VARIANCE s                     »F10.4
         /IXt»STANOARD DEVIATION s           iFlO.fl
         /1X» 'STANDARD hR«QR OF MtrAN a
  *»ITE(6»133)
  FORMAT('IDVtRALL CHl-SQUAPE  TEST FOR GOODNESS  OF
tRlCS {NO. LVEMT8 PER CELL) COMBINED'/' SO THAT  NO
2| QUCNCV IS LESS THAN "i.(>'//•  RANGE OF»/
3        1X,'MQ. EVCNTS  OBSERVED    CALCULATED   DIFFERENCE'
4        IX,' PER CELL   NO. CELLS   NQ, CELLS       0*C
52/C'/)
  KsO
                                                         FIT»  WJtTH  CATE60
                                                         COMPUTED CELL  FR
                                                                  (0»C)**
       RF1=0,
       TCHI2B9.
       00 139 J=lfN1
       IF(J.LT.Ni) GOTO  135
           F2.r,F-.3.')J  GOfO  137
135
137

1375
       GOTO
       1F(«F2.LT.3.0)  r.OfO  139
       IF(K.Ltf.l)  GOTO  1385
       DsRFl 1-^22
       CHJ2=D**2/HF2?
                                     167

-------
       TCHl2sTCHI2*CH!2
       wRlTt(6.138) Jilt J??»RFUtRF22iDieMl£
138    pORMATUX»I4f i-»»I3iF10.0tF15.'li2F12,4)
1585   J11*Jl
       J22SJ2
       JtaJ
       RF1»0.
       RF2«0.
       IF(J.LT.NUOR.HAKK.EQ.l) GOTO 139
       GOTO 1375
15*»    CONTINUE
       NCPSK-?
       w»lTr.(6?l
-------
     The computer printouts  from  program POISSON-1  for  two typical cases are
given in Tables C-l and C-2.  In  the  top segment of each printout, the possible
numbers of fibers per field  (labeled  "events per cell") are listed at the left:
0, 1, 2, 3, etc.  The succeeding  columns are:  the observed numbers of fields
having the specified numbers of fibers in them, the corresponding calculated num-
bers of fields based on an assumed Poisson distribution, and the differences
between the observed and calculated numbers of fields.
     The next segment of the computer output provides the following overall items
of information on the sample.   (1) The total number of  fields observed (F) .  (2) Th.
total calculated number of fields assuming that the Poisson distribution applies;
this is made equal to the observed number.  (3) The total number of fibers observed
including those crossing the field perimeter as well as those lying entirely within
their field.  (4) The total calculated number of fibers; this is made equal to the
observed number.  (5) The mean number of fibers per field; this is the sample value
of the Poisson parameter A.  (6)  The  sum of squared deviations around the mean.
(7) The degrees of freedom, one less  than the number of fields.  (8)  The variance.
(9) The standard deviation, i.e., the square root of the variance.  (10) The stand-
ard error of the mean.  Items (6) through (10) are the usual sample statistics,
computed by treating each field as a  unit of observation without reference to the
Poisson distribution.
     The final segment of each printout  gives the results of the goodness-of-fit
test for the Poisson distribution.  The  classes defined by the number of fibers
per field are grouped to the extent necessary for each  of the calculated numbers
of fields to be no smaller than 3.0 so that the Ghi-square values are not unduly
inflated.  For example, in sample 1 the  classes after grouping are:  0 fibers per
field, 1 fiber per field, 2 fibers per field, and 3 or  more fibers per field.
The smallest calculated number of fields is 7.32 for the last grouped class, and
the corresponding observed number is  17.
     The succeeding columns  are the observed  numbers  of fibers  in the classes
after grouping  the calculated numbers,  the  differences  between the observed and
calculated numbers, i.e. 0-C, and the contributions to  Chi-square, i.e.  (0-C)  /C.
     The final  items of  information  are the number of classes after  grouping,  the
degrees of freedom associated with  the total Chi-square value, and the  total Chi-
square value itself.  The number of  degrees of freedom is two less than the number
                                       169

-------
                         Table C-l

           PRINTOUT OF RESULTS FROM POISSON-1 PROGRAM

           ~f "tCase of poor agreement with Poisson model)
   "WO.
    PER  CELL,
         I
         2
         4
         5
                OBSERVED
                NO, CELLS
         7
         ft
                      1
                   22,
                   12.
                     4,
1.
0,
0,
 CALCULATED
 NO. CELLS

   97,3504
   70,0923
   25.2332
    6.0560
    1.0901
     .1570
     ,0l«f
     ,0019
     ,0002
     .0000
                    DIFFERENCE
                       0-C
                      29,0923
                      •3.2332
                       2.9099
                       -.1570
                                            .9981
                                            •0002
                                            .0000
(1) tOTAt-0S»C*VED  CEtLf  «
<2) TOfAL CALCULATED  CELLS  •
(3) TOTAL OBSERVED  EVENTS «
(4) WAtrtatcotimro  EVENT*
                                    100,0000
                                    200,0000
                                    ua,oooo
                                    144,0000
                           N0§  EVENT8
 (5) MEAN EVENTS PER CELL *
 (6) SUM OF SQUARED DEVIATIONS  •
 (7) -&f«RE«-UF FREEDOM •  " "~
 (8) VARIANCE «
 (9) STANDARD DEVIATION *
<10) fTANDAWO ERROR OF
                                      .7200
                                   246,3200
                                   199,0000
                                     1,2378
                                     1,1126
                                      .0787
   .y. EVENTS
   PER CELL
     0-  0
     I-  1
     2"  2
               OBSERVED
               NO.  CELLS

                  120*
                  41.
                  22,
                  17,
CALCULATED
NO, CELLS

  97.3504
  70,0923
  25.2332
   7,3240
DIFFERENCE
   o-c

  22,6496
 •29,0923
  •3,2332
   9,6760
                                   5,2696
                                  12,0710
                                    • 4U3
                                  12.7634
  NO, CLASSES  AFTER  GROUPING •   4
  DEGREES OF FREEDOM •            I
—TflTAl CHI-SOUARE •        -   30.5423

-------
                         Table C-2
            PRINTOUT OF RESULTS FROM POISSON-1 PROGRAM

            26  (case of good agreement with Poisson Model)
       EVENTS
    PER CEU
         i
         2
       _-5

         4
         5
         6
         7
         8
         9
       10
       H
       12
 OBSERVED
 NO,  CEILS

    38.
    42.
    32,
    16.
    11,
     0.
     0,
     It
     0.
     0.
     0.
     0.
     0.
 CALCULATED
 NO*  CELLS

   32.3740
   47,4048
   14,7071
   16,9404
   6.2014
   U8161
     ,4432
     .0927
     ,0170
     .0026
     ,0004
     .0001
     .0000
DIFFERENCE
   o»c

   5,62*0
  -5.4048
  -2,7071
   ••9404
   4,7986
  •1,8161
   .,4432
    ,9073
    .0170
    ,0026
    • 0004
     ,0001
    ,9000
 (l)TOTAL OBSERVED  CELLS «
 (2mf*t™C*tmATED CELLS •
 (3)TOTAL OBSERVED  EVENTS *
 (4)TO?AL CALCULATED EVENTS «
                    140.0000
                    140*0000
                    205,0000
                    205.0000
   STATISTICS  APPLYING TO NO, EVENTS PER CELL
                      1.8643
                    238.8214
                    139,0000
                      j,7isi
                      1,3106
                       ,1108
 (5)*f*trtVENtfr ?ER CELL »
 (6)SUM OP SQUARED  DiVIATSQNS
 (7)DESREE3 OF  FREEDOM •
 (9)STANDARO  DEVIATION •
(lO)STANDARD  ERROR  OF  MEAN •
   NO.  EVENTS
    PER CELL
 0"
 1*
~2'tf
 3"
 4*
0
1
2
OBSERVED
NO, CELLS

   38.
   42,
   32.
   16,
   12.
CALCULATED  DIFFERENCE
NO, CELLS      0-C
                              32.3740
                              47,4048
                              34.7071
                              16,9404
                               8,5736
               5,6260
              •5,4046
              •2,7071
               •.9404
               3,4264
                ,9777
                ,6162
                ,2112
                ,0522
               1,3693
   NO,  CLASSES AFTER SROUPINS  «    5
   DEGREES OF FREEDOM •            3
   TOTAL CHX«S8UARE »              3.2266

-------
of classes because two constraints based on the data were imposed in computing the
Poisson sequence, i.e., equality of the observed and computed number of fields and
equality of the observed and computed number of fibers.   Or, in other words, the
two parameters F and X were evaluated from the sample data.
     Sample 1 is an illustrative case in which there is  poor agreement between the
actual data and the Poisson model (P < .001).  On the other hand, sample 26 is a
case in which there is good agreement (.5 > P > .3).  Inspection of the observed
and calculated numbers of fibers per cell for sample 1 after pooling (bottom seg-
ment of the computer printout) reveals the pattern of departures from the Poisson
frequencies:  there is an excess of observed fields with no fibers, and also an
excess of observed fields with three or more fibers, as  compared with the calculated
frequencies; these excesses are of course balanced by deficiencies in the observed
fields with one or two fibers in them.  This is the general pattern to be expected
if there is a tendency for fibers to aggregate beyond that would occur simply by
chance settling.  In all cases in which there was a poor fit of the Poisson distri-
bution the same type of pattern occurred in the departures of the observed frequen-
cies from the calculated.
                                        172

-------
LISTING OF COMPUTER PROGRAM POISSON-2 FOR OBTAINING PERCENT CONFIDENCE LIMITS
ON THE MEAN OF A POISSON VARIABLE
 C PROGRAM POISSON2 TO COMPUTE CONFIDENCE LIMITS FOR THE EXPECTED VALUE
 C OF A POISSON RANDOM VARIABLE IN A SPACE OF THE SIZE EXAMINED (THE
 C SAMPLE SPACE) AND IN THE REFERENCE SPACEt WHICH MAY DIFFER IN SIZE
 C PROM THE SAMPLE SPACE,
 C WRITTEN BY F C BOCKt IIT RESEARCH INSTITUTE.
 C PCCONF IS THE CONFIDENCE LEVEL. I, t,» THE PERCENT PROBABILITY THAT THE
 C L-XPEC.TED VALUE OF THt POISSON VARIABLE LIES NITKIN THE COMPUTED
 C CONFIDENCE INTLRVAL
 c SI*EI is THE NUMBER OF SPATIAL UNITS IN THE SAMPLE SPACE
 C SJfE2 IS THE NUMBER OF SPATIAL UNITS IN THE REFERENCE SPACE
 C C IS THE OBSERVED NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES (COUNT) IN THE SAMPLE SPACE
 C RMEAN IS THE OBSERVED NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES TRANSLATED TO THE REFERENCE  SPACE
 C LCLi IS THE LOWER CONFIDENCE LIMIT FOR THE EXPECTED VALUE OF C
 C UCL1 IS THE UPPER CONFIDENCE LIMIT FOR THE EXPECTED VALUE OF C
 C LCL2 IS THE LOWER CONFIDENCE LIMIT FOR THE EXPECTED VALUE OF RMEAN
 c ucL2 is THE UPPER CONFIDENCE LIMIT FOR THE EXPECTED VALUE OF RMEAN
       REAL LCLt(LCL2
       DIMENSION LABELS)
 101    FORMAT<» CONFIDENCE LIMITS FOR THE EXPECTED VALUE OF A POISSON VAR
      SIABLE IN A SPACE OF THE SIZE EXAMINED (THE SAMPLE SPACE)!/
      S I AND ALSO IN THE REFERENCE SPACE*)
       WRITE(6»103)
 103   FORMATC'U CONFJDENCE'tSX'SIZE OF I i SX'OBSERVED* »4X»LIHITS ON TME«»
      S TX*SIIE OF*»3XmFERENCE»«4X*LIMITS ON THE'*/* PROBABILITY* t«X
      S *SAMPLC1F»2Xr«FREQUENCYif3X»EXPECTATION OF C' »/IX 'REFERENCE* i2X
      S «FREeUENCY*t3X*EXPECTATIOM OF M*/3X *Pf RCENT «,6X »SPACE« »7X»C
      S »LOWER ' f1X» UPPER* ?7X* SPACE1* 6X *M i i8X*LOWER* »<|Xt UPPER • »3X
      $ »CAS£ DESCRIPTION*/)
 HI    READ(5fH3) PCCONF»Ct SIZE! tSI?E2. LABEL
       FORMAT (4FS.-0»6A6)
       iP^PCCqMF.eE.^W^*,) STOP
       AUPMA*(100»PCCONF)/200
       RNUa2*C
       LCll«CHIOFPU»ALPHA»RNll)/2
       RNU*2»(C+1)
       gCLl«CHIOFP< ALPHA »RNU)/2
       FACTOR*SIZE2/SXZEl
       LCL2«FACTOR*LCL»
       UCL2»FACTOR*UCL1
       WRITE{6il2l) PCCONF, SIlEttC»LCLliUCLl»SIfE2rRMFA»*tLCL2»UCL2»LABEL
 121   FORMAT<4XF5»2»'lXF8,?,2XF9,3,2X,2(F».3»lX),3XP8.2t3XF9,3»2X,
      S 2(F8,3tlX),6A6)
       GOTO 111
       REAL FUNCTION CHIOFP(P»RNU)
 C CHIOFP COMPUTES AN APPROXIMATE  VALUE  OF  CHl-sSQUARE  FOR  GIVEN  PROBABILITY
 C P fTNTEGRAL FROM CHISQUARE TO INFINITY)  AND  DEGREES OF  FREEDOM  RWU,
 C RNU SHOULD NOT BE LESS THAN 30.  FROM  HANDBOOK  OF  MATHEMATICAL FUNCTIONS.*
 C NBS APPLIED MATH. SERIES 55* 26.4.17
                                         173

-------
      CMIQFPs-t.
      ircp.LL'.o.oR.p.tit.i j
      RETURN
      RfAL FUNCTION XCIFP(P)
      p COMPUTES AN APPRQXlMATK VALUF  OF  THE  STANDARDIZED NORMAL DEVIATE
C X AS A FUNCTION OF .'fug PROBABILITY P  (II  IT  P  Lfc  O.S AND P IS THE AREA
C UKPCR THE NORNAL DENSITY CURVE TO THK RIGHT OF  X).  FROM HANDBOOK OF
c MATHEMATICAL KINC.TIONS* wes APPtito  MATH, SERIFS V.M  afe.a.as (HASTINGS)
      XOFPS999.
      ircp.LL'.t'.oR.p.&e.n
      PlsP
      IP(P.GT.O.b) Pt»1-P
      rsSQRT(AtOG(l/lP»*Pl)»
     $ +.10I508*T»T*T))
      IFfP.GT.O.S) XOFPs-XOFP
      RETURN
•XOT
9«3.  93.  I. /I/I 1.   CHRYSOi 2H3t STAND
95.  ott.  ,72  1,   CHRYSO* 2'2tt STAND
9«J.  209. 2.J6 I.   CMRYSCt 2132. STAND
99999
                                       174

-------
                                   APPENDIX D
      OPTIMIZED METHOD FOR MEASUREMENT OF AIRBORNE ASBESTOS CONCENTRATIONS

PROVISIONAL METHODOLOGY
Short Form
     (1)  Collect an air sample on a Nuclepore filter, pore size 0.4 ]am,  using
a high-volume or personal samplers.
     (2)  Coat filter portion with about 40 nm thick carbon film using a  vacuum
evaporator..
     (3)  A 60 or 100 mesh stainless steel mesh is placed on top of a filter
paper stack or form sponge contained in a petri dish.  Chloroform is carefully
poured into the petri dish until the level is just touching the stainless steel
mesh.  A 2.3 mm diameter (or 1 mm x 2 mm) portion of carbon coated filter is put
particle side down on a 200 mesh carbon coated copper electron microscope grid
and this pair placed on the steel mesh.  The 2.3 mm diameter (or 1 mm x 2 mm)
portion is wetted with a 5 yJl drop of chloroform.  The Nuclepore will be  dis-
solved away in 24 to 48 hours.  Chloroform may be added to maintain the level
in the petri dish.
     (4)  Examine the EM grid under low magnification TEM to determine its suit-
ability for high magnification examination.  Ascertain that the loading is suit-
able and is uniform, that a high number of grid openings are intact, and that
the sample is not contaminated.
     (5)  Systematically scan the EM grid at a magnification of 20,OOOX  (screen
magnification 16,OOOX).  Record the length and breadth of all particles  observed
if they have an aspect ratio of 3:1 or greater and substantially parallel sides.
Observe the morphology of the fiber using the 10X binocular and note whether a
tubular structure characteristic of chrysotile asbestos  is present.   Switch into
SAED mode and observe the diffraction pattern.  Note whether the  pattern is
typical of chrysotile or amphibole asbestos, or whether  it is  ambiguous, or
neither chrysotile or amphibole.
                                       175

-------
     (6)  Count 100 fibers in several grids squares, or alternatively count all
fibers in at least 10 grid squares.  If more than 300 fibers are observed in
one grid square, then a more lightly loaded filter sample should be used.  If
no other filter sample can be obtained, the available sample should be trans-
ferred onto a 400 mesh grid.  Processing of the sample using ashing and Boni-
fication techniques should be avoided wherever possible.
     (7)  Fiber number concentration is calculated from the following
                / 3       Fiber Count     . Total Filter Area
               s/m    No. Fields Counted *  Area of a Field
                           1
                 Volume of Air Sampled
Fiber mass for each type of asbestos is calculated by assuming that the breadth
measurement is a diameter, thus the mass can be calculated from

          Mass (ym) = j- length (jam) • [diameter (ym)]  • density  (g/cm ) 10

The density of chrysotile is assumed to be 2.6 g/cm  , amphibole 3.0.  The mass
concentration for each type of asbestos is then
          Mass Concentration        m ,. i «     jrxn T^T.     c mi.   m    /  \
          t  i 3\  c   -D  *.-  i     Total Mass of All Fibers of That Type (yg)
          (yg/m-3) of a Particular = 	„ /r—K&
          Type of Asbestos                  Volume of Air Sampled  (m )
     (8)  Other parameters characterizing the asbestos fibers are:
          (a)   Length and width distributions of chrysotile fibers.
          (b)   Volume distribution of chrysotile fibers.
          (c)   Fiber concentration of other types of asbestos species.
          (d)   Relative proportion of chrysotile fibers with respect to total
               number of fibers.
                                       176

-------
                                     APPENDIX E
   ESTIMATING  CHRYSOTILE MASS  QN AIR FILTERS USING NEUTRON ACTIVATION TECHNIQUE
m
I IT Research Institute
10West 35 Street. Chicago, Illinois 60616
312/567-4000
                                         March 22,  1977
     Dr. Arthur Morgan
     Environmental and Medical  Sciences  Div.
     Building 551
     AERE Harwell, Oxfordshire
     0X11 ORA
     England

     Dear Dr. Morgan:

          Pursuing the telephone conversation of  Dr.  Harwood with you  on
     18 March, I have prepared  a few Nuclepore membranes  for analyzing
     chrysotile by neutron activation.   The samples are as  follows:

                          Sample No.      Area of Membrane

                             142         4-1/4" x  6"

                             154         4-1/4" x  4-3/4"

                               2         8" x 10"  (Blank)

                              4         8" x 10"  (Blank)

     Transmission electron microscopic study of sample 142 gave us an
     estimate of about 0.07 Ug/cm .   Since I am providing 4-1/4" x 6" area
     of this membrane, I  hope there is enough mass of chrysotile for an
     accurate measurement by neutron activation.   I am also enclosing a
     sample of asbestos used for preparing the membrane samples.

          Please analyze  these  samples at your earliest and bill us.

                                          Yours very truly,
                                          Anant V. Samudra
                                          Research Scientist
     AVS/eb
     encl.
                                          177

-------
                               n   II
                               ti--«l*—-»
Environmental and Medical
Sciences Division ,  3551
AERE Harwell, Oxfordshire   '  .
0X11 ORA
Tel: Abingdon (0235) 24141 Ext.  ^22
Telegrams: Aten, Abingdon
Telex 83135
                                                      Date   31st May 1977
 Dr C F Harwood
 IIT Research Institute
 10 West 35 Street
 Chicago
 Illinois
 USA
Dear Colin

We have  attempted to  assess the amount of chrysotile on the membrane filter
samples  you  sent  using neutron activation analysis.  Unfortunately, however,
the  amount of  chromium on the blank filters is sufficient to prevent an
accurate determination of fibre at the level required, using the 5°Cr(nY)  Cr
reaction.  I have discussed the possibility of using infra-red analysis with
people in  our  analytical  group and they do not feel that measurements can be
made at  the  level required using this technique either.

There will of  course  be no charge for this work but I should point out that
£600 is  still  outstanding for our work on the fibre loaded  filters.
I understand that Dr  Hearsey of our Marketing and Sales Department has written
to you about this.

With best  regards

Yours sincerely
A Morgan
                                       17"8

-------
                                 APPENDIX F
                  X-RAY FLUORESCENCE ANALYSIS OF STANDARD
                           SAMPLES OF CHRYSOTILE

     An independent means for measuring the mass concentration of asbestos in
filter-deposited samples is needed if such samples are to be useful in deter-
mining the accuracy of mass concentration estimates made by electron micro-
scopy.
     Air sample 154, used in the inter-laboratory comparisons of the pro-
visional optimal procedure, consisted of high purity chrysotile deposited on
Nuclepore filters in an aerosol chamber.  X-ray fluorescence (XRF) analysis of
these deposits for Mg provided a convenient, independent and non-destructive
means for determining the mass concentrations of chrysotile on these filters.
     The XRF measurements were carried out at the EPA Environmental Sciences
Research Laboratory (Research Triangle Park, North Carolina) with a simultaneous
multiwavelength spectrometer (Siemens MRS-3) adapted for air pollution samples
using procedures described by Wagman [65].   Fluorescence intensities above back-
ground of the Mg K  line were measured using 1000-second counting intervals.
The calibration standard consisted of a vacuum-evaporated film of Mg deposited
                              2
at a concentration of 47 yg/cm  on mylar film.  The Mg K  sensitivity was 70.73 cps
         o
per yg/cm  and the minimum detectable limit for a 1000-second count, on the basis
                                   2
of 3a above background, was 1 ng/cm .
     Precision analysis of a series of XRF measurements of  chrysotile deposits
indicated a relative standard deviation of less than 4 percent.   Particle size
and other fluorescence attenuation correction factors were  not needed because
EM examination of chrysotile deposits showed that all fibers had diameters under
0.1 ym with only rare instances of fiber overlap.  The method  of computation is
illustrated as follows.
                                     179

-------
SAMPLE CALCULATION METHOD



Method:     Measurement of Mg by XRF using Siemens MRS-3



                 Chrysotile Concentration = 3.8 x Mg Concentration

                                                                          9

Magnesium:  Vacuum evaporated Mg on Mylar and uniform Mg cone,  of 47 yg/cm

Standard



                 S   (Mg sensitivity) = 70.7315 counts/sec/yg/cm2



                 N  (Nuclepore background) = 640 counts/1000 seconds
                  B




                                              3i/N~
                 Minimum Detection Limit         B
                 for 1000 sec counting           inno

                                            Mg X



                                         = 0.00107 yg/cm2
                    MEASUREMENTS ON NUCLEPORE FILTER 154
Measurement
1
2
3
4
5
6
Counts /sec -blank
0.980
1.022
1.019
1.076
1.017
1.090
yg Mg/cm
0.0139
0.0144
0.0144
0.0152
0.0144
0.0154
                 Mean = 0.0146 yg Mg/cm"

                                                      2
                 Standard Deviation = 0.00057 yg Mg/cm



                 Relative Std. Dev. = 100 x (Std. Dev)/Mean = 3.9%


                                                          2
                 Particle size correction factor, (1 + ab) , is very

                 small (within Std. Dev.) and hence neglected.



                 Assuming all Mg is in chrysotile form, and that

                 Chrysotile Mass Concentration = 3.8 x Mg Concentration



                 Chrysotile Mass Cone. = 3.8 x (0.0146 + 0.00057) yg/cm2



                                       = 0.0555 + 0.0022 yg/cm2
                                     180

-------
                                   3
Total Volume of Air Sampled = 9.2 m
                            2
Total Filter Area = 406.5 cm

Air Volume/cm2 of Filter = 0.02263 m3/cm2

Chrysotile Mass Cone. _ 0.0555 ± 0.0022
in Air Sampled        '
                      = (2.452 + 0.096) yg/ra3

The X-ray fluorescence measurements of chrysotile are
summarized in Table F-l.
                Table F-l

      MEASUREMENT OF CHRYSOTILE MASS
          CONCENTRATIONS BY XRF
          ANALYSIS FOR MAGNESIUM

Sample No.
154
142 C
154 A
154 B
168 D
Mg Cone.
yg/cm
0.0146
0.0117
0.0111
0.0108
0.0120
Chrysotile Cone.*
/ 2
yg/cm
0.0555
0.0445
0.0422
0.0410
0.0456
ygM3
2.452
1.966
1.865
1.812
2.015
* A chrysotile/Mg factor of 3.8 was used.
  The aerosol volume sampled per unit
  filter area was 0.02263 m3/cm2.
                     181

-------
                                   TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
                            (Please read Instructions on the reverse before completing)
 1. REPORT NO.
 EPA 600/2-78-038
                                                           3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
EVALUATING AND OPTIMIZING ELECTRON MICROSCOPE
METHODS  FOR  CHARACTERIZING AIRBORNE ASBESTOS
                                         5. REPORT DATE
                                          June 1978
                                         6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
 7. AUTHOR(S)
 A.V.  Samudra,  F.C.  Bock, C.F. Harwood, and J.D.  Stockham
                                                           8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO.
 9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
 IIT  Research Institute
 10 West 35th Street
  Ihieago,  Illinois  60616
                                         10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
                                           1AD712  BA-14  (FY-77)
                                         11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.

                                          68-02-2251
 12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
 Environmental Sciences Research Laboratory - RTF,  NC
 Office of Research and Development
 U.  S.  Environmental Protection Agency
 Research Triangle Park, N. C.  27711
                                         13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
                                          Final Report  6/75-6/77	
                                         14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
                                          EPA/600/09
 15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
 This  report complements EPA Report 600/2-77-178  entitled "Electron Microscope
 Measurement of Airborne Asbestos Concentrations  —  A Provisional Methodology Manual"
 16. ABSTRACT
 Evaluation  of EM methods for measuring airborne  asbestos fiber concentrations  and size
 distributions was carried out by studying a  large number of variables and subprocedures
 in  a five-phase program using elaborate statistically designed experiments.  Observa-
 tions were  analyzed by advanced regression techniques to evaluate the effects  of
 independent variables and subprocedures.  It was shown that the optimized method  for
 estimating  airborne chrysotile should have the following features:  (a) collecting an
 air sample  on Nuclepore filter; (b) coating  the  Nuclepore filter with carbon;  (c)
 transferring the particulate deposit to a 200-mesh electron microscope grid using
 chloroform  in a modified Jaffe-wick washer;  (d)  examining the grid at about 10,000 x
 nagnification (20,000 x for counting very fine fibers);  (e) counting fibers using a
 (field of  view method; and (f) identifying the type of asbestos from morphology and
 selected  area electron diffraction.

  provisional manual of instructions was prepared (EPA Report 600/2-77-178) and six
 independent laboratories participated in an  interlaboratory test of the proposed  method
 using two air samples.  One of these was prepared at  IITRI from pure aerosolized  UICC
 chrysotile,  and the other was an ambient air sample collected by IITRI personnel  in a
 factory processing asbestos.  Intercomparison of the  results from the separate labora-
 tories yielded some preliminary estimates of the precision and accuracy of the provi-
 g-irmal
                                KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
 rAir pollution
 'Asbestos
 :Serpentine
 'Amphiboles
 Measurement
DESCRIPTORS
   ^Electron microscopy
   *Electron diffraction
                                              b.iDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS
Chrysotile
                                                                            COSATl Field/Group
                            08G
                            HE
                            14B
 8. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT

IELEASE TO PUBLIC
                            19. SECURITY CLASS (This Report)
                            UNCLASSIFIED
                           21. NO. OF PAGES
                                197
                                              20. SECURITY CLASS (Thispage)
                                              UNCLASSIFIED
                                                       22. PRICE
EPA Form 2223-1 (Rev. 4-77)   PREVIOUS EDITION is OBSOLETE
                                            182

-------